Marantz Home Theater System SR6001 User Manual

Model SR6001 User Guide  
AV Surround Receiver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords  
should be routed so that they are not likely  
to be walked on or pinched by items placed  
upon or against them, paying particular  
attention to cords at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit  
from the product.  
19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects  
of any kind into this product through openings  
as they may touch dangerous voltage points  
or short-out parts that could result in a fire or  
electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind  
on the product.  
24.Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product should  
be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as  
recommended by the manufacturer.  
25. Heat – The product should be situated away  
from heat sources such as radiators, heat  
registers, stoves, or other products (including  
amplifiers) that produce heat.  
FIGURE 1  
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER  
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ANSI/NFPA 70  
20. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this  
product yourself as opening or removing  
covers may expose you to dangerous voltage  
or other hazards. Refer all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
14. Protective Attachment Plug – The product  
is equipped with an attachment plug having  
overload protection. This is a safety feature.  
See Instruction Manual for replacement or  
resetting of protective device. If replacement  
of the plug is required, be sure the service  
technician has used a replacement plug  
specified by the manufacturer that has the  
same overload protection as the original plug.  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN WIRE  
21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug  
this product from the wall outlet and refer  
servicing to qualified service personnel under  
the following conditions:  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is  
damaged.  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810-20)  
15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside  
antenna or cable system is connected to the  
product, be sure the antenna or cable system  
is grounded so as to provide some protection  
against voltage surges and built-up static  
charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical  
Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information  
with regard to proper grounding of the mast  
and supporting structure, grounding of  
the lead-in wire to an antenna-discharge  
unit, size of grounding conductors, location  
of antennadischarge unit, connection to  
grounding electrodes, and requirements for  
the grounding electrode. See Figure 1.  
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have  
fallen into the product.  
ELECTRIC  
SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or  
water.  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810-21)  
d. If the product does not operate normally by  
following the operating instructions. Adjust  
only those controls that are covered by  
the operating instructions as an improper  
adjustment of other controls may result in  
damage and will often require extensive  
work by a qualified technician to restore the  
product to its normal operation.  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC ART 250, PART H)  
GROUND CLAMPS  
NEC - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian  
ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme  
à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
16. Lightning – For added protection for this  
product during a lightning storm, or when it is  
left unattended and unused for long periods  
of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and  
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This  
will prevent damage to the product due to  
lightning and power-line surges.  
e. If the product has been dropped or damaged  
in any way, and  
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change  
in performance this indicates a need for  
service.  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
22. Replacement Parts – When replacement  
parts are required, be sure the service  
technician has used replacement parts  
specified by the manufacturer or have the  
same characteristics as the original part.  
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire,  
electric shock, or other hazards.  
17. Power Lines – An outside antenna system  
should not be located in the vicinity of  
overhead power lines or other electric light or  
power circuits, or where it can fall into such  
power lines or circuits. When installing an  
outside antenna system, extreme care should  
be taken to keep from touching such power  
lines or circuits as contact with them might be  
fatal.  
U.S. Responsible Party: Marantz America, Inc.  
100 Corporate Drive,  
Mahwah, NJ, 07430, U.S.A.  
TEL: 630-741-0300  
23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any  
service or repairs to this product, ask the  
service technician to perform safety checks  
to determine that the product is in proper  
operating condition.  
18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets,  
extension cords, or integral convenience  
receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire  
or electric shock.  
Type of Product:  
Model:  
AV Surround Receiver  
SR6001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
INTRODUCTION ....................................2 SETUP ..................................................26  
ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM.........................26  
BASIC OPERATION (TUNER).............53  
LISTENING TO THE TUNER...........................................53  
PRESET MEMORY..........................................................54  
LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO..........................56  
SEARCH MODE...............................................................57  
PRESET MEMORY..........................................................58  
PRECAUTIONS......................................2  
1 INPUT SETUP .............................................................28  
DESCRIPTION .......................................2  
2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP..........................................31  
FEATURES.............................................5  
ERROR MESSAGES .......................................................34  
ACCESSORIES......................................5  
3 SURROUND SETUP ...................................................37  
4 VIDEO SETUP .............................................................39  
FRONT PANEL ......................................6  
FL DISPLAY AND INDICATOR ..........................................7  
MULTI ROOM SYSTEM.......................60  
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI ROOM  
OUT TERMINALS.............................................................60  
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI SPEAKER  
TERMINALS .....................................................................60  
OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS WITH  
THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI ROOM...........61  
5 PREFERENCE ............................................................40  
6 ACOUSTIC EQ ............................................................42  
REAR PANEL.........................................8  
BASIC OPERATION (PLAY BACK).....44  
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE...................................44  
FUNCTION AND OPERATION ..........................................9  
SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE...........................44  
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION .......9  
OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROL UNIT .................11  
ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME ..................................44  
GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC5001SR TO SR6001..12  
NIGHT MODE...................................................................44  
TROUBLESHOOTING .........................62  
HDMI.................................................................................63  
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................63  
CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................13  
ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) CONTROL..44  
BASIC OPERATION.........................................................15  
DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE.....................44  
CONNECTIONS ...................................17  
SPEAKER PLACEMENT .................................................17  
VIDEO CONVERT............................................................45  
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS..........64  
DIMENSIONS ......................................64  
I/P CONVERT...................................................................45  
CONNECTING SPEAKERS.............................................17  
TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND .................45  
CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS..........................18  
USING THE SLEEP TIMER.............................................45  
CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS..........................20  
SURROUND MODE .............................46  
SURROUND.....................................................................46  
ADVANCED CONNECTING ............................................21  
CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS.........21  
SOURCE DIRECT ...........................................................46  
CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS.................22  
PURE DIRECT ................................................................46  
XM RADIO OVERVIEW ...................................................23  
OTHER FUNCTION..............................50  
CONNECTING THE XM CONNECT-AND-PLAY  
TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION........................................50  
ANTENNA.........................................................................23  
ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL ................50  
CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM........................24  
LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES .........................50  
CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT.............................25  
DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE .........................................50  
VIDEO ON/OFF................................................................50  
DISPLAY MODE...............................................................51  
SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL AUDIO  
INPUT ..............................................................................51  
RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE.............................51  
SPEAKER A/B ..................................................................51  
7.1 CH INPUT...................................................................52  
AUX2 INPUT.....................................................................52  
LIP.SYNC..........................................................................52  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Neo:6 offers a music mode to expand stereo  
nonmatrix recordings into the five- or six-channel  
layout, inawaywhichdoesnotdiminishthesubtlety  
and integrity of the original stereo recording.  
INTRODUCTION  
PRECAUTIONS  
DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES  
DESCRIPTION  
Thank you for purchasing the Marantz SR6001  
Surround receiver.  
To ensure long-lasting use, do not locate the SR6001  
where it is:  
• Exposed to direct sunlight.  
This remarkable component has been engineered  
to provide you with many years of home theater  
enjoyment. Please take a few minutes to read this  
manual thoroughly before you connect and operate  
the SR6001.  
Asthereareanumberofconnectionandconfiguration  
options, you are encouraged to discuss your own  
particular home theater setup with your Marantz A/V  
specialist dealer.  
• Near sources of heat such as heaters.  
DTS was introduced in 1994 to provide 5.1 channels  
of discrete digital audio into home theater systems.  
DTSbringsyoupremiumqualitydiscretemultichannel  
digital sound to both movies and music.  
DTS is a multichannel sound system designed to  
create full range digital sound reproduction.  
The no compromise DTS digital process sets the  
standard of quality for cinema sound by delivering  
an exact copy of the studio master recordings to  
neighborhood and home theaters.  
DTS-ES Extended Surround is a new multichannel  
digital signal format developed by Digital Theater  
Systems Inc. While offering high compatibility with  
the conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTS-  
ES Extended Surround greatly improves the 360-  
degree surround impression and space expression  
thanks to further expanded surround signals. This  
format has been used professionally in movie  
theaters since 1999.  
In highly humid or poorly ventilated environments.  
• Dusty.  
• Subjected to mechanical vibrations.  
• On wobbly, inclined or otherwise unstable  
surfaces.  
• In locations such as in cramped audio racks  
where radiated heat is blocked.To ensure proper  
heat radiation, ensure the below clearance from  
walls and other equipment.  
XM Satellite Radio Ready  
In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C,  
SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES Extended Surround also  
offers the SB (Surround Back) channel for surround  
playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES  
Extended Surround includes two signal formats with  
different surround signal recording methods, as DTS-  
ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1.  
Now, every moviegoer can hear the sound exactly as  
the moviemaker intended.  
DTS can be enjoyed in the home for either movies or  
music on of DVD’s, LD’s, and CD’s.  
Above  
8 inchs (20 cm)  
or more  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Left  
8 inchs (20 cm)  
or more  
Right  
8 inchs (20 cm)  
or more  
A
V
SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI  
UT  
A
UTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
OUND  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
A
O
SURR  
MT  
X
6
.
1
N
I
G
H
T
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
A
AC  
P
C
M
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
“DTS”, “DTS-ES and “Neo:6” are trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
The XM name and related logos are registered  
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MultEQ  
MIC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
HT-EQ  
EXIT  
A
UX  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
The advantages of discrete multichannel systems  
over matrix are well known.  
Rear  
8 inchs (20 cm)  
or more  
Buteveninhomesequippedfordiscretemultichannel,  
there remains a need for high-quality matrix decoding.  
This is because of the large library of matrix surround  
motion pictures available on disc and on VHS tape;  
and analog television broadcasts.  
The stereo CD is a 16-bit medium with sampling at  
44.1 kHz. Professional audio has been 20- or 24-  
bit for some time, and there is increasing interest  
in higher sampling rates both for recording and for  
delivery into the home. Greater bit depths provide  
extended dynamic range. Higher sampling rates  
allow wider frequency response and the use of anti-  
alias and reconstruction filters with more favorable  
aural characteristics.  
The typical matrix decoder of today derives a center  
channel and a mono surround channel from two-  
channel matrix stereo material. It is better than a  
simple matrix in that it includes steering logic to  
improve separation, but because of its mono, band-  
limited surround it can be disappointing to users  
accustomed to discrete multichannel.  
DTS 96/24 allows for 5.1channel sound tracks to be  
encoded at a rate of 96kHz/24bits on DVD-Video  
titles.  
When DVD-video appeared, it became possible to  
deliver 24-bit, 96 kHz audio into the home, but only in  
two channels, and with serious limitations on picture.  
This capability has had little use.  
DVD-audio allows 96/24 in six channels, but a  
new player is needed, and only analog outputs are  
provided, necessitating the use of the D/A converters  
and analog electronics provided in the player.  
Neo:6 offers several important improvements as  
follow,  
• Neo:6 provides up to six full-band channels of  
matrix decoding from stereo matrix material.Users  
with 6.1 and 5.1 systems will derive six and five  
separate channels, respectively, corresponding to  
the standard home-theater speaker layouts.  
• Neo:6 technology allows various sound elements  
within a channel or channels to be steered  
separately, and in a way which follows naturally  
from the original presentation.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTS 96/24 offers the following:  
1. Sound quality transparent to the original 96/24  
master.  
About Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology delivers a natural  
and immersing 7.1-channel listening experience  
to the home theater environment. A product of  
Dolby's expertise in surround sound and matrix  
decoding technologies, Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a  
complete surround sound solution that maximizes  
the entertainment experience from stereo as well as  
5.1-channel encoded sources.  
2. Full backward compatibility with all existing  
decoders. (Existing decoders will output a 48 kHz  
signal)  
Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technologycertified  
by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized  
surround sound experience from two speakers using  
a multichannel Dolby Digital source. Additionally,  
Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround  
sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby  
Pro Logic II.  
Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original  
Multichannel audio information and provides the  
listener with the sensation of being surrounded by  
additional speakers.  
HDCD® (High Definition Compatible Digital ®) is a  
patented process for delivering on Compact Disc the  
full richness and details of the original microphone  
feed.  
HDCD encoded CDs sound better because they are  
encoded with 20-bits of real musical information as  
compared to 16-bits for all other CDs.  
HDCD overcomes the limitation of the 16-bit CD  
format by using a sophisticated system to encode  
the additional four bits onto the CD while remaining  
completely compatible with the CD format.  
When listening to HDCD recordings, you hear more  
dynamic range, a focused 3-D sound stage, and  
extremely natural vocal and musical timbre. With  
HDCD, you get the body, depth and emotion of the  
original performance not a flat, digital imitation.  
HDCD system manufactured under license from  
Microsoft. This product is covered by one or more  
of the following: In the United States 5,479,168  
5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 5,838,274 5,854,600  
5,864,311 5,872,531 and in Australia 669,114 with  
other patents pending.  
3. No new player required: DTS 96/24 can be carried  
on DVD-video, or in the video zone of DVD-audio,  
accessible to all DVD players.  
4. 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-  
motion video, for music programs and motion  
picture soundtracks on DVD-video.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is fully compatible with Dolby  
Surround Pro Logic technology and can optimally  
decode the thousands of commercially available  
Dolby Surround encoded video cassettes and  
television programs with enhanced depth and  
spatiality. It can also process any high-quality  
stereo or Advanced Resolution 5.1-channel music  
content into a seamless 6.1- or 7.1-channel listening  
experience.  
“DTS” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby Digital identifies the use of Dolby Digital audio  
coding for such consumer formats as DVD and DTV.  
As with film sound, Dolby Digital can provide up  
to five full-range channels for left, center, and right  
screen channels, independent left and right surround  
channels, and a sixth (“.1”) channel for low-frequency  
effects.  
Circle Surround II (CS-II) is a powerful and versatile  
multichannel technology. CS-II is designed to enable  
up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback  
from mono, stereo, CS encoded sources and other  
matrix encoded sources. In all cases the decoder  
extends it into 6 channels of surround audio and a  
LFE/subwoofer signal. The CS-II decoder creates a  
listening environment that places the listener “inside”  
music performances and dramatically improves  
both hi-fi audio conventional surround-encoded  
video material. CS-II provides composite stereo rear  
channels to greatly improve separation and image  
positioning– adding a heightened sense of realism to  
both audio and A/V productions.  
CS-II is packed with other useful feature like dialog  
clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like bass  
enrichment (TruBass). CS-II can enable the dialog  
to become clearer and more discernable in movies  
and it enables the bass frequencies contained in the  
original programming to more closely achieve low  
frequencies–overcoming the low frequency limitations  
of the speakers by full octave.  
TheDolbyHeadphonetechnologyprovidesasurround  
sound listening experience over headphones.  
When listening to multichannel content such as DVD  
movies over headphones, the listening experience  
is fundamentally different than listening to speakers.  
Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering  
the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs  
greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby  
utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to  
solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing,  
immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby  
Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D audio from  
stereo material.  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is an improved matrix  
decoding technology that provides better spatiality  
and directionality on Dolby Surround program  
material; provides a convincing three-dimensional  
soundfield on conventional stereo music recordings;  
and is ideally suited to bring the surround experience  
to automotive sound. While conventional surround  
programming is fully compatible with Dolby Surround  
Pro Logic II decoders, soundtracks will be able to be  
encoded specifically to take full advantage of Pro  
Logic II playback, including separate left and right  
surround channels. (Such material is also compatible  
with conventional Pro Logic decoders.)  
HDMI, the  
and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
HDMI Licensing LLC.  
Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth output  
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done  
using a matrix decoder that derives three surround  
channels from the two in the original recording. For  
best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with  
movies soundtracks recorded with Dolby Digital  
Surround EX.  
Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and  
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.  
Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity and TruBass  
technology are incorporated under license from SRS  
Labs, Inc.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
out-of-phase relative to the others. It measures the  
distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening  
position and adjusts the delays so that sound from  
each loudspeaker arrives at the same time. Finally,  
Audyssey MuitEQ determines the playback level of  
each loudspeaker and adjusts the volume trims so  
that all levels are equal.  
There are several factors that can degrade the sound  
from even the best loudspeakers in a listening room.  
One of the most important is the interaction of sound  
from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as  
walls, the floor, and the ceiling in the room. Even  
with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical  
treatments, there are significant problems that are  
caused by room acoustics. These include reflections  
from nearby surfaces and standing waves that are  
created between large parallel surfaces in the room.  
In a home theater the situation is further complicated  
because there are several listening locations. The  
effects of room acoustics on the sound arriving at  
each person’s ears are very different and the result is  
a listening experience that is degraded in a different  
way for every person in the room. It is not uncommon  
to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as  
large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency range  
below 250 Hz.  
MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are  
trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc. All rights  
reserved.  
The solution to this problem is to apply room correction  
after precisely measuring how each loudspeaker  
interacts with the room. Because the room causes  
variations in the frequency response of the  
loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat, it  
is important to measure each loudspeaker at several  
locations in the listening room. This should be done  
even if there is only one listener. Measurement at a  
single location is not representative of the acoustical  
problems in the room and will in most cases, degrade  
overall performance. Audyssey MultEQ is the only  
technology that can achieve room correction for  
multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does so  
by combining the data collected at several points in  
the room from each loudspeaker and then applying  
correction that minimizes the acoustical effects of  
the room and is matched to the frequency resolution  
of human perception (known as psychoacoustics).  
Furthermore, MultEQ correction is applied both  
in frequency and time domains and so there are  
no artifacts (such as smearing of sound or modal  
ringing)that are sometimes associated with traditional  
methods of room equalization.  
Inadditiontocorrectingfrequencyresponseproblems  
over a wide listening area, Audyssey MultEQ  
provides a completely automated sound system  
set-up process. It identifies how many loudspeakers  
are connected to the amplifiers and whether they  
are full-range, satellites, or subwoofers. If there is a  
least one subwoofer connected, Audyssey MultEQ  
determines the optimum crossover frequency  
between each satellite and the subwoofer(s). It  
automaticallychecksthepolarityofeachloudspeaker  
and alerts the user if there are any that may be wired  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• HDMI  
• Function Rename  
• HDCD  
• Dolby Headphone  
• Bi-amp drive  
• Source/Pure Direct mode  
• 9 bands x 7 ch GEQ  
• DSD direct conversion  
• DSD to PCM converter  
• Assignable DC Trigger Output  
• Flasher Input  
FM Antenna  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is an  
enhancement to the DVI (Digital Visual Interface)  
standard. It adds capabilities for digitally transmitting  
audio signals in addition to video signals. Where  
multiple cables were previously needed for audio/  
video, HDMI enables audio/video connection via a  
single cable.  
The HDMI input jacks of this receiver support HDMI  
Ver. 1.2. and the HDMI output jacks of this transmitter  
support HDMI Ver. 1.1.  
FEATURES  
The SR6001 incorporates the latest generation of  
digital surround sound decoding technology such as  
Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1  
and Matrix 6.1), DTS Neo:6 (Cinema, Music), Dolby  
Pro-Logic II (Movie, Music and Game), Dolby Pro-  
Logic IIx (Movie, Music and Game), Circle Surround  
II (Cinema, Music and Mono).  
In addition, Marantz has focused on the future. By  
utilizing pre-out jacks, 7.1 direct inputs and a RS-  
232C communication port, the SR6001 is tomorrow’s  
technology, today!  
Front AUX Jack Cover  
Ver. 1.2 supports 1-bit audio formatting and enables  
transmission of DSD (Direct Stream Digital) signals  
of Super Audio CD.  
PPUUS  
SH  
H
ACCESSORIES  
Copyright Protection  
The SR6001 incorporates the most advanced  
Digital Signal Processing circuitry, along with a 192  
kHz/24 bit D/A converter in each of the 7 channels.  
Independentpowersupplycircuitsareincorporatedfor  
the FL display, audio and video sections for maximum  
separation, clarity and dynamic range. Together with  
hand-selected customized components, all elements  
work in harmony to recreate the emotion, exactly as  
the artist had intended.  
Remote Controller RC5001SR  
This receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital  
Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection  
technology that consists of data encoding and other  
device authentication. Its purpose is to protect digital  
video content. Both this receiver and the connected  
component (such as a video player or monitor) must  
support HDCP. Before connecting a component to  
this receiver, refer to its instruction manual.  
LEARN  
SO  
U
R
CE  
S
SEND  
LEEP  
SET  
DISPLAY  
AITP  
O
FF  
1
P.DIRECT  
CS  
ON  
I
I
4
2
SU  
R
RO  
M-CH  
S
EX/ES  
dt  
s
UN  
D
T
3
7
5
L
IP  
IN  
S
VIRTUAL  
STEREO  
YN  
PUT  
B
C
/
A
N
D
C
8
6
L
User Guide  
7.1CH  
N
T.M  
CH/CAT  
IG  
ODE  
HT  
IN  
9
4
0
P
SPKR A/B  
.SC  
A/D  
AN  
+10  
4
H
MULTI/  
T-E  
Q
OS  
MU  
TE  
D
M
E
CAT  
MO  
VOLLUME  
M-SPKR  
T.T  
S
ON  
E
TU  
E
ENTER  
P/  
MENU  
BASS  
T.D  
ISP  
PRESET  
PTY  
DISC  
EXIT  
+
F.DIRECT  
C
H-  
SEL  
ANG  
TUNING  
LE  
V
SU  
B
-O  
T
F
F
TITLE  
V
BASS  
TUNER  
A
A
D
TT  
UD  
IO  
V
.
D
TAPE  
CD  
V
C
TR  
EBL  
R
E
AUX  
1
CDR  
D
S
S
S
Y
S
T
AUX  
2
EM  
MD  
R
EM  
O
R
TE  
C
AMP  
5
C
O
500  
N
S
TR  
O
R
L
LE  
R
• Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES  
(Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1, Neo:6)  
• Dolby Pro Logic II (Movie, Music, Game)  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Movie, Music, Game)  
• Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music, Mono)  
• Audyssey Mult EQ  
• 7 × 100 Watts (8 Ohms), Discrete Amplifiers  
• High Power Current Feedback Circuitry  
• Massive Energy Power Supply, Huge EI  
Transformer, Large ELCO’s.  
• 192 kHz/24 bit DAC for all 8 Channels  
• 32 bit Digital Surround Processing Chipsets  
• Video Off Mode  
The SR6001 is designed and engineered with  
extensive feedback from custom installation experts,  
dealers and consumers. It features multi-room/  
multisource, assignable DC trigger, a RS-232C  
communication port, Flasher input, heavy duty  
speaker binding posts and an extensive array of both  
analog and digital inputs / outputs. With 5 assignable  
digital inputs (6 total), 4 component inputs, Super  
Audio CD Multi Channel (7.1 channel) direct inputs,  
video convert system and a speaker-B and OSD  
output versatility is taken to a stunning new level.  
Furthermore, the SR6001 can output the OSD  
information through theY/C (S-video) and composite  
video outputs.  
AAA-size batteries × 2  
Warranty Card  
USA × 1  
Canada × 1  
AC cable  
• Large Heavy Duty Speaker Terminals for all  
Channels  
• RS-232C Terminal for Future Upgrade or System  
Control  
An easy-to-use programmable, learning remote  
control allows full access to all of the operating  
functions and can be used for system operation as  
well.  
Set Up Menu via all Video Output  
(Composite, S-Video, Component video and  
HDMI)  
AM Loop Antenna  
• Auto Input Signal Detection  
• Improved Station Name Input Method, 60 Presets  
• AutoAdjustFunctionforSpeakerDistanceSettings  
(Delay Time)  
The new generation of Marantz Receivers is stylish  
and completely symmetrical. On the front panel of  
the SR6001, buttons are kept to a minimum. Source  
selectors and volume controls are intuitively placed.  
The SR6001 is here to perform in your unrivaled home  
entertainment setup.  
• Front Optical AUX Input  
(Digital Camera, Portable DVD)  
• Programmable, learning remote control  
• Video convert system  
HDMI Component Video ↔  
S-Video Composit Video  
• Video I/P Converter  
• Assignable Video Input  
• Lip Sync (Audio Delay)  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
!
MEMORY button  
!
HT-EQ button  
FRONT PANEL  
Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory  
numbers or station names. (See page 54)  
Press this button to switch between HT-EQ ON/Off.  
!
7.1CH INPUT button  
!
CLEAR button  
Press this button to select the output of an external  
multichannel player.  
q
w
e rtyu  
io!!  
!
!
!
Press this button to cancel the station-memory  
setting mode or preset scan tuning. (See page 55)  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
!
MENU button  
!
INFRARED receiving sensor window  
This button is used to enter the SETUP MAIN  
MENU.  
This window receives infrared signals for the remote  
control.  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MTX 6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
!
VOLUME control knob  
! Cursor (5, , 2, 3) / ENTER button  
Use these buttons when operating the SETUP MAIN  
MENU and TUNER function.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
Adjusts the overall sound level. Turning the control  
clockwise increases the sound level.  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
!
AUX1 INPUT jacks  
@
EXIT button  
These auxiliary video/audio input jacks accept the  
connections of a camcorder, portable DVD, game  
etc. When not using these jacks, protect with the  
included jack covers.  
This button is used to exit from the SETUP MAIN  
MENU.  
@
DISPLAY button  
!! ! ! ! @@ @@  
How to Attach the Front AUX Jack Cover  
When this button is pressed, the FL display mode  
is changed as Input display Surround Mode →  
Auto-display Off Display Off Function name  
display and the display off indicator (DISP) lights up  
is condition DISPLAY OFF.  
q
POWER switch and STANDBY  
indicator  
r
SURROUND MODE button  
UP  
You can select the surround mode by pressing this  
button.  
DIGITA  
L
When this switch is pressed once, the unit turns ON  
and the display illuminates. When pressed again, the  
unit turns OFF and the STANDBY indicator will be  
illuminated.  
S-VID  
AUX  
1
IN  
EO  
PUT  
VIDE  
O
L
AUDIO  
t
AUTO (Auto surround) button  
R
@
MultEQ button / MIC jack  
Press this button to select the AUTO mode from  
the surround modes. When this mode is selected,  
the receiver determines the surround mode  
corresponding to a digital input signal automatically.  
PPUUSSHH  
Presstoautomaticallymeasurespeakercharacteristics  
using the microphone. (See page 32)  
w
INPUT SELECTOR knob  
(AUDIO/ VIDEO)  
Note:  
This knob is used to select the input sources.  
• A special microphone (option) is needed to use the  
MultiEQ function. (See page 32)  
y
MULTI (Multi Room) button  
Front AUX Jack Cover  
Note:  
Press this button to activate the Multiroom system.  
MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display.  
(See page 60)  
• When the input source is set to TUNER, it is possible  
to select the video source separately.  
@
SPEAKER A/B button  
!
PURE DIRECT button and indicator  
Press this button to select speaker systems A and/or  
B.  
When this button is pressed once, “SOURCE  
DIRECT” appears on the FL display.If pressed again,  
PURE DIRECT” appears. After 2 seconds, the FL  
display indication goes out.  
e
HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones  
u
MULTI SPEAKER button  
This jack may be used to listen to the SR6001’s  
output through a pair of headphones. Be certain  
that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo  
phono plug. Note that the main room speakers will  
automatically be turned off when the headphone  
jack is in use.  
Press this button to activate the Multiroom Speaker  
system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the  
display. (See page 60)  
In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control  
circuitry and bass management are bypassed.  
i
BAND button  
Notes:  
Press this button to switch between FM and AM in  
the TUNER mode.  
• The surround mode is automatically switched to  
AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.  
Notes:  
• When using headphones, the surround mode will  
change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by  
MENU and Cursor button.  
• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed  
automatically as follows.  
o
T-MODE button  
Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or  
mono mode when the FM band is selected.  
The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.  
(See page 53)  
Front SPKR = LARGE  
Center SPKR = LARGE  
Surround SPKR = LARGE  
Surround Back SPKR = LARGE  
Sub woofer = YES  
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting  
as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the  
jack.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Opening and closing the front panel door  
When you want to use the controls behind the front  
panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the  
lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when  
not using these controls.  
PCM  
FL DISPLAY AND INDICATOR  
This indicator is illuminated when the input signal is  
PCM (pulse code modulation).  
2 SURROUND  
s
f
h
k
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
a
d
g
j
¡
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Surround  
signal is input.  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST  
V
OFF NIGHT PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 SPKR AB EQ  
C
LFE  
S
L
R
AV  
SURR  
OUND RE  
IN  
P
U
T
S
E
¡
ENCODED CHANNEL STATUS indicators  
L
E
CEIV  
ER  
C
T
O
R
SR6001  
PCM  
These indicators display the channels that are  
encoded with a digital  
SL  
SR  
D
IS  
ST  
P
A
NDB  
M
UL  
Y
SL  
E
T
I
E
P
P
A
U
O
A
TO  
W
U
T
E
O
R
S
O
U
T
U
N
R
R
N
E
/O  
D
F
F
D
IR  
E
S
T
C
T
S
P
K
D
R
IS  
A
C
B
6
.1  
V
-O  
F
MT  
F
X
P
E
6
input signal. If the selected digital input signal is  
Dolby Digital 5.1ch or DTS 5.1ch, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”,  
SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.If the digital input  
signal is 2 channel PCM-audio, “L” and “R” will be  
displayed.  
If Dolby Digital 5.1ch signal with Surround EX flag  
or DTS-ES signal comes in, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” ,  
SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.  
.
1
A
H
K
N
A
T
IG  
T
PHON  
ES  
T
A
N
A
L
O
D
G
IG  
IT  
A
L
S
U
R
R
O
U
L
A
A
D
ND  
IG  
C
IT  
A
P
L
C
M
C
LF  
R
SL  
E
S
SR  
¡ ¡  
¡
¡
¡
V
O
L
U
M
E
DO  
W
R
E
N
A
D
Y
U
P
a
DISP (Display Off) indicator  
l
SPKR (speaker) AB indicator  
D
IG  
IT  
A
L
S
-V  
ID  
A
UX  
E
O
1
IN  
P
U
T
This indicator is illuminated when the SR6001 is in  
the display off condition.  
Active speaker system will be illuminated by this  
indicator.  
V
IDE  
O
L
A
U
D
IO  
R
s
SLEEP timer indicator  
¡
PEAK indicator  
Caution:  
This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer  
function in the main-room is in use.  
This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input  
signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is  
greater than the capable level of internal processing,  
this will illuminate. If this happens, you should press  
the ATT button on the remote. (See page 10)  
¡
Main Information Display  
• Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the  
door and the panel.  
This display shows messages relating to the status,  
input source, surround mode, tuner, volume level or  
other aspects of unit’s operation.  
d
Multi-room system indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the multi-room  
system is active.  
¡
SOURCE DIRECT indicator  
¡
ATT (Attenuation) indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the SR6001 is in  
the SOURCE DIRECT mode.  
This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation  
function is active.  
f
AUTO SURR  
(Auto Surround mode) indicator  
This indicator is illuminated to show that the AUTO  
SURROUND mode is in use.  
¡
DIGITAL Input Indicator  
¡
DSD indicator  
This indicator lights when a digital input has been  
selected.  
This indicator illuminates when a DSD (Direct Stream  
Digital) signal of an Super Audio CD is input via the  
audio signal included in the HDMI input signal.  
g
TUNER’s indicators  
AUTO : This indicator illuminates when the  
tuner’s Auto mode is in use.  
¡
ANALOG input indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when an analog input  
source has been selected.  
TUNED : This indicator illuminates when  
a station is being received with  
sufficient signal strength to provide  
acceptable listening quality.  
¡
PURE DIRECT indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the SR6001 is in  
the PURE DIRECT mode.  
¡
SIGNAL FORMAT indicators  
ST(Stereo) : This indicator illuminates when an  
FM station is being tuned into stereo  
condition.  
2 DIGITAL  
HDCD indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital  
signal is input.  
EX  
When HDCD signal is decoded, this indicator will  
light up.  
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital EX  
signal is input.  
dts  
h
DTS-ES mode indicators (DISC6.1, MTX6.1)  
These indicators will illuminate to show the DTS-ES  
decoding mode (Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1).  
HDMI indicator  
This indicator illuminates when an HDMI device is  
connected to the input and a link is established.  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is  
input.  
ES  
j
V (video)-OFF mode indicator  
EQ indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the Video-OFF  
function is active.  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal  
is input.  
This indicator is illuminated when the EQ MODE is  
selected to “AUDDYSSEY”, “FRONT” or “FLAT”.  
96/24  
k
NIGHT mode indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24 signal  
is input.  
This indicator is illuminated when the SR6001 is in  
the Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range of  
digital program material at low volume levels.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
u
Speaker outputs terminals  
(SURROUND BACK / MULTI  
SPEAKER / SPEAKER C)  
!
Preamp Outputs  
REAR PANEL  
(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)  
Jacks for L (front left), R (front right), C (Center), SL  
(surround left), SR (surround right), SBL (surround  
back left) and SBR (surround back right).  
Use these jacks for connection to external power  
amplifiers.  
Two terminals are provided for the front left, and  
right speakers for multi room (2nd zone) or surround  
back.  
The terminals can be used to connect a third set of  
speakers by setting the SPEAKER C selector switch  
to ON. For connection and use, see page 24.  
q
w
e
r t y u  
i
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
SURROUND  
BACK  
SPEAKER  
SYSTEMS  
MODEL NO. SR6001  
OUTPUT  
L
L
R
L
!
Subwoofer Output  
( )  
FM 75  
FRONT  
A
GND AM ANTENNA  
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
/
C
B
/
C
R
/
P
Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered  
subwoofer. If an external subwoofer amplifier is used,  
connect this jack to the subwoofer amplifier input.  
If you are using two subwoofers, either powered or  
with a 2 channel subwoofer amplifier, connect a “Y”  
connector to the subwoofer output jack and run one  
cable from it to each subwoofer amplifier.  
Y
/
/
Y
/
Y
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
P
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
PB  
R
)
(
)
R
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
RS-232C  
(
INPUT 1 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 2 DSS  
)
i
Speaker outputs terminals  
HDMI  
Ver1.2  
MULTI SPEAKER  
/SPEAKER C  
@
@
@
XM  
Seven terminals are provided for the front (A) left,  
front (A) right, front (B) left, front (B) right, front center,  
surround left, and surround right speakers.  
AC IN  
DSS  
(4) MONI. OUT  
TV(1) DVD(2)  
VCR(3)  
OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR  
TV(1)  
DVD  
(2)  
VCR(3)  
FRONT  
B
IN  
OUT  
R
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
VIDEO  
4
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IN  
DC OUT  
DIGITAL IN  
5
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX.  
L
SL  
C
ON  
OFF  
CEN  
TER  
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
1
2
3
OPT.  
OUT  
L
o
SPEAKER C switch  
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
SURR  
OUND  
Set to ON to connect a bi-amp to this receiver or set  
to OFF for normal speaker connection (surround  
back and multiroom speakers). (See page 24)  
L
R
7.1CH  
IN  
!
7.1 CHANNEL or AUX2 INPUT  
!
R
FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.  
SURR BACK : 6 - 8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio CD  
multichannel player, or other components that has a  
multichannel port, you can playback the audio with  
5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs.  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
(
)
AUX2  
AUDIO  
!
AC OUTLETS  
Connect the AC power cables of components such as  
a DVD and CD player to these outlets. SWITCHED and  
UNSWITCHED outlets are provided.  
The one marked SWITCHED provides power only  
when the SR6001 is turned on and is useful for  
components which you use every time you play your  
system.  
The one marked UNSWITCHED is always live as  
long as the SR6001 is plugged into a live outlet.  
A component connected here may be left on  
permanently, or may be switched off with via its own  
power switch.  
!!  
! !  
!
! ! ! ! o  
!
FLASHER IN (Flasher input terminal)  
These terminals are to control the unit from each zone.  
Connect the control signal from a Keypad, etc.  
q
FM antenna terminal (75 ohms)  
e
Multiroom Output (Audio output)  
Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial  
This is the audio output jack for the Multi zone (Multi  
cable, or a cable network FM source.  
room).  
!
DC TRIGGER output terminal  
Connectthesejackstooptionalaudiopoweramplifiers  
to listen the source selected by the multiroom system  
in a remote room.  
Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC  
under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc…)  
Use the system OSD setup menu to determine the  
conditions by which these jack will be active.  
AM antenna and ground terminals  
Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the  
terminals marked “AM” and “GND”. The supplied AM  
loop antenna will provide good AM reception in most  
areas. Position the loop antenna until you hear the  
best reception.  
Note:  
r
MONITOR OUT  
Caution:  
• This output voltage is for (status) control only, It is  
not sufficient for drive capability.  
These are monitor outputs and each one includes  
both composite video and S-video configurations.  
When connecting two video monitors or televisions,  
be aware that the OSD interface can be used with  
both MONITOR OUT connections.  
• In order to avoid potential turn-off thumps, anything  
plugged into these outlets should be powered up  
before the SR6001 is turned on.  
w
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/  
OUTPUT  
• The capacity of this AC outlet is 150W. Do not  
connect devices that consume electricity more than  
the capacity of these AC outlets. If the total power  
consumption of the connected devices exceeds the  
capacity, the protection circuit shuts down the power  
supply.  
!
MULTI ROOM REMOTE IN/OUT terminals  
IN: Connect to a multi-room remote control  
device, available from your Marantz dealer.  
If your DVD player or other device has component  
video connectors, be sure to connect them to these  
component video connectors on the SR6001. The  
SR6001 has 4 component video input connectors to  
OUT: Connect to the Marantz component equipped  
with remote control (RC-5) terminals in Multi  
zone (Multi room).  
t
RS-232C  
The RS-232C port is to be used in conjunction with  
an external controller to control the operation of the  
SR6001 by using an external device.  
B
R
obtain the color information (Y, C , C ) directly from  
the recorded DVD signal or other video component,  
and 1 component video output connector to output  
the information directly into the matrix decoder of the  
display device.  
By sending the pure DVD component video signal  
directly, the DVD signal forgoes the extra processing  
that normally would degrade the image. The result is  
vastly increased image quality, with incredibly life like  
colors and crisp detail.  
The RS-232C port may also be used in the future to  
update the operating software of the SR6001 so that  
it will be able to support new digital audio formats and  
the like as they are introduced.  
!
AC INLET  
!
REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT terminals  
Connect to a Marantz component equipped with  
remote control (RC-5) terminals.  
Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET and  
then into the power outlet on the wall.  
SR6001 can be powered by 120V AC only.  
y
XM terminal  
See page 23 for connecting information.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9/NIGHT button  
z
LEARN indicator  
!
AUDIO IN/OUT (TV, DVD,VCR,  
DSS,TAPE, CD/CDR)  
Pressing this button prevents the Dolby Digital  
signal from playback at a loud voice. This function  
reduces the voice by 1/3 to 1/4 at maximum. Thus, it  
eliminates the occurrence of an abruptly loud voice  
at night. However, the function is valid only in the  
case when the Dolby Digital signal is entered into  
OPTICAL or COAXIAL and data to compress the  
voice exists in the signal to be played back.  
When this button is pressed, the “NIGHT” indicator  
is illuminated.  
REMOTE CONTROL  
OPERATION  
FUNCTION AND OPERATION  
Indicates when the remote controller is in the LEARN  
mode.  
These are the analog audio inputs and outputs.  
There are 6 audio inputs and 3 audio outputs. The  
audio jacks are nominally labeled for cassette tape  
decks, compact disc players, DVD players and etc....  
The audio inputs and outputs require RCA-type  
connectors.  
x
SET button  
This button is used to enter learn mode and preset  
mode.  
The provided remote control unit is a universal  
remote controller. The POWER button, numeric  
buttons and control buttons are used in common  
across different input source components.  
The input source controlled with the remote control  
unit changes when one of the input selector buttons  
is pressed.  
c
/ SOURCE ON/OFF button  
This button is used to turn a specific source (such as  
a DVD player) on or off independently from the rest  
of the system.  
@
DIGITAL INPUT (Dig.1 - 5) /  
OUTPUT (coaxial, optical)  
0/7.1CH IN button  
Press this button to select the output of an external  
multi channel decoder.  
These are the digital audio inputs and outputs.There  
are 2 digital inputs with coaxial jacks, 3 with optical  
jacks.  
The inputs accept digital audio signals from a  
compact disc, LD, DVD, or other digital source  
component.  
v
SLEEP button  
This button is used for setting the sleep timer.  
(+10) A/D button  
Used to switch between the analog and digital  
inputs.  
b
DISPLAY button  
Selects the display mode for the front display of the  
SR6001.  
For digital output, there is 1 coaxial output and 1  
optical output.  
The digital outputs can be connected to MD  
recorders, CD recorders, DAT decks, or other similar  
components.  
m
CL (Clear) button  
LEARN  
SEND  
n
Numeric buttons  
This button is used to erase the memory or program  
of a source.  
z
x
c
v
b
¤
¤
¤
These buttons are used to switch between 0 to +10  
of the source components.  
If the source is set to the amplifier, these buttons are  
used to perform operations.  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
,
SPKR A/B button  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
Used to select the speaker system.  
The speaker system is switched in the following  
sequence.  
AUTO  
dts  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
EX/ES  
@
VIDEO IN/OUT  
(TV, DVD,VCR, DSS)  
1/AUTO button  
Used to select auto surround.  
n
4
5
6
A B A+B off  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
These are the video inputs and outputs. There  
are 4 video inputs and 1 video output and each  
one includes both composite video and S-video  
configurations. Connect VCRs, DVD players, and  
other video components to the video inputs.  
¤
7
8
9
A/D  
2/Dolby button  
Used to select DOLBY mode.  
.
CH/CAT3(UP) / 4(DOWN) buttons  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
These buttons are used to change channels.  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
m
,
.
¤
¤
¤
¤
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
3/dts button  
Used to select dts mode.  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
MULTI/CAT button  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
Used to turn on and off multi room.  
The 1 video output channel can be used to connected  
to video tape recorders for making recordings.  
4/CSII button  
Used to select CSII mode.  
INFO  
MENU  
¤
¤
INFO button  
5/EX/ES button  
Used to select EX/ES mode.  
@
HDMI INPUT / OUTPUT  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
When this button is pressed, the current setting are  
displayed on the TV monitor.  
ENTER  
This unit has 2 HDMI inputs and 1 HDMI output. The  
input function can be selected from the OSD menu  
system. (See page 19)  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
6/VIRTUAL button  
Used to select VIRTUAL mode.  
EXIT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
7/M-CH ST button  
Used to select Multi Channel Stereo.  
T.TONE/SET UP button  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
(When AMP mode is selected)  
Used to enter the test tone menu.  
8/STEREO button  
Used to select STEREO mode.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
CH-SEL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TUNER  
TAPE  
AUX1  
AMP  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL buttons  
¤
BAND/LIP SYNC/INPUT button  
¤
VOLUME +/- buttons  
AUDIO buttons  
These buttons are used when operating PLAY, STOP,  
PAUSE and other commands of a source.  
This button is used to adjust the volume for the  
amplifier and television.  
(When TUNER mode is selected)  
Used to select a radio band.  
(When DVD mode is selected)  
Used to select one of the audio language.  
(When TUNER mode is selected)  
Note:  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
Used to select LIP SYNC mode.  
TREBLE +/- buttons  
Set the AMP mode to use this button with the  
SR6001.  
T.DISP button  
Used to select the display mode in RDS.  
These buttons are used to adjust the tone control of  
high frequency sound for left and right speaker.  
(When TV mode is selected)  
Used to select monitor input.  
PTY button  
¤
M-SPKR button  
SOURCE button  
Used to display the programme type information of  
the current station.  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
Used to turn on and off multi speaker.  
¤
T.MODE button  
These buttons are used to switch the source of your  
A/V Receiver / amplifer. Each time a source button is  
pressed, the remote control changes to the source  
which was pressed.  
Thisremotecontrolcancontrol12typesofequipment.  
To change the A/V Receiver / amplifier source, press  
this button twice within two seconds. The signal is  
sent when it is pressed the second time.  
(When TUNER mode is selected)  
Used to select auto stereo mode or mono mode  
when the FM band is selected.  
F.DIRECT button  
Used to select the "Frequency direct input".  
¤
MENU button  
PRESET +/- buttons  
Used to select a preset station up and down.  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
This button is used to call up the SETUP MAIN  
MENU of the SR6001.  
The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.  
¤
P.SCAN button  
TUNING +/- buttons  
Used to tune a frequency station up and down.  
(When TUNER mode is selected)  
Used to start preset scan.  
¤ 1,2,3,4(CURSOR) / ENTER  
Note:  
buttons  
ANGLE/V-OFF buton  
Select the AMP as the source to use this remote  
controll with the SR6001.  
These buttons are used when controlling the cursor  
of the SR6001, DVD or other AV equipment.  
¤
MEMO/HT-EQ button  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
Used to turn off the video signal.  
This button is used to store setting to memory or  
program a source.  
Infrared Transmitter and Learning  
Sensor  
EXIT button  
DISC+/CH. SEL button  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
This button is used to cancel setting in the setup  
menu.  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
Used to call up SETUP MAIN MENU and adjust  
speaker levels or 7.1 ch input level.  
Used to turn on or off HT(Home Theater)-EQ mode.  
This mode compensates for the audio portion of a  
movie sounding “bright”.  
This transmitter emits infrared light. Press the  
buttons while pointing the transmitter towards the  
infrared receiver window of the SR6001 or other  
AV equipment. Be sure to also point towards other  
remote controls when using the learning function.  
SUBTITLE/ATT. button  
BASS +/- buttons  
¤
MUTE button  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
These buttons are used to adjust the tone control  
of low frequency sound for left, right and subwoofer  
speaker.  
This button is used to mute the audio for the amplifier  
and television.  
When the input signal is too high and the voice  
distorts even by throttling the SR6001 VOLUME  
control, turn on this function.  
ATT” is indicated when this function is activated.  
The input level reduced. Attenuator is invalid for the  
output signal of “REC OUT”.  
Note:  
Set the AMP mode to use this button with the  
SR6001.  
SEND indicator  
Indicates when the remote controller is transmitting  
a signal.  
Note:  
/ POWER ON and OFF buttons  
This function is unavailable while the digital input is  
selected.  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
These buttons are used to turn the SR6001 on or  
off.  
SURROUND button  
This button is used to selects the surround mode.  
¤
P.DIRECT button  
When this button is pressed, the tone control circuit  
is bypassed.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOADING BATTERIES  
CAUTIONS ON BATTERIES  
OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
REMOTE CONTROL  
• Use “AAA” type batteries in this remote control  
unit.  
The life of the batteries used with the remote control  
is about 4 months with normal use. Also be sure to  
replace batteries earlier when you notice that they  
are getting weak.  
• We recommend that you use alkali batteries.  
The distance between the transmitter of the remote  
control and the IR SENSOR of the SR6001 should  
be less than 5 meters. If the remote control is pointed  
in a direction other than the IR SENSOR or if there is  
an obstacle between them, use of the remote control  
may not be possible.  
• If the remote control unit does not operate from  
close to the main unit, replace the batteries with  
new ones, even if less then a year has passed.  
1. Remove the back cover.  
• The included battery is only for verifying operation.  
Replace it with a new battery as soon as possible.  
• When inserting the batteries, be careful to do so in  
the proper direction, following the + and - marks in  
the remote control unit’s battery compartment.  
Remote-controllable range  
SR6001  
To prevent damage or battery fluid leakage:  
- Do not use a new battery with an old one.  
- Do not use two different types of batteries.  
A
V
SU  
RR  
OU  
ND  
IN  
PU  
T
SE  
LE  
RE  
CE  
CT  
OR  
IVE  
R
SR  
60  
01  
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or  
dispose of batteries in flames.  
5 m  
DISP  
ST  
A
NDB  
MU  
L
x.  
Y
SLEEP  
T
I
PO  
WE  
A
A
U
TO  
U
T
R
O
O
SURR  
TU  
NED  
DI  
REC  
T
N/O  
FF  
ST  
SPKR  
6.1  
DISC  
A
B
V
-OFF  
MT  
X
6
PEAK  
.
1
NIGHT  
A
T
T
PH  
ON  
ES  
ANA  
DIG  
LOG  
I
T
A
L
SUR  
DIG  
R
O
A
A
UND  
L
C
IT  
A
C
P
C
L
M
LFE  
S
R
SL  
SR  
V
O
Appro  
LU  
ME  
E
DO  
WN  
• Remove the batteries when not planning to use the  
remote control unit for a long period of time.  
UP  
2. Insert the new batteries (AAA type) with correct  
DIG  
IT  
A
L
S-VI  
DEO  
A
U
X
1
INP  
UT  
VIDE  
O
L
A
UD  
IO  
R
and  
polarity.  
• If the batteries should leak, carefully wipe off the  
fluid from the inside of the battery compartment,  
then insert new batteries.  
60°  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country  
or area.  
SY  
ST  
EM  
RE  
MO  
RC  
TE  
55  
CO  
NT  
00  
SR  
RO  
LL  
ER  
Remote control unit (RC5001SR)  
3. Close the cover until it clicks.  
Notes:  
• Do not mix alkaline and manganese batteries.  
• Do not mix old and new batteries.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC5001SR TO SR6001  
To control the SR6001 by your RC5001SR, you have to select the device AMP or TUNER by pressing the  
SOURCE button. Please refer below for the details in AMP and TUNER mode.  
AMP MODE  
TUNER MODE  
SOURCE ON / OFF Turns the SR6001 on and off  
0-9  
BAND  
Inputs the numeric  
Selects a radio band  
LEARN  
SEND  
LEARN  
SEND  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
SLEEP  
Turns the SR6001 off  
Turns the SR6001 on  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
T.MODE  
P.SCAN  
CL  
Selects the auto stereo mode or mono mode  
Starts preset scan  
Clears the inputting  
l/  
l/  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
Sets the sleep timer function  
Changes the front display mode  
Selects the pure direct mode  
Selects the surround mode  
Selects auto surround  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
AUTO  
dts  
DISPLAY  
BAND  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
EX/ES  
EX/ES  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
AUTO (1)  
MEMO  
INFO  
Enters the tuner preset memory numbers  
Shows preset information  
4
5
6
4
5
6
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
7
8
9
A/D  
7
8
9
A/D  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
T.DISP  
Selects the display mode in RDS  
Selects the “Frequency direct input”  
Selects a preset station up and down  
Tunes a frequency station up and down  
Turns XM Category Search mode ON/OFF  
Switches categories in Category Search mode  
CL  
MEMO  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
0
+10  
DOLBY (2)  
dts (3)  
Selects DOLBY mode  
Selects dts mode  
F.DIRECT  
PRESET 3/ 4  
TUNING 3/ 4  
MULTI/CAT  
CH/CAT  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
CSII (4)  
Selects CSII mode  
Selects EX/ES  
INFO  
MENU  
INFO  
MENU  
EX/ES (5)  
VIRTUAL (6)  
M-CH ST (7)  
STEREO (8)  
NIGHT (9)  
7.1CH IN (0)  
A/D (+10)  
Selects VIRTUAL mode  
Selects Multi Channel Stereo  
Selects STEREO mode  
Turns on or off NIGHT mode  
Selects the 7.1CH IN  
ENTER  
ENTER  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
EXIT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
PRESET  
TUNING  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
Switches between the analog or digital inputs  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
LIP SYNC / INPUT Selects the LIP SYNC mode  
HT-EQ  
CH-SEL  
CH-SEL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
BASS  
TREBLE  
Turns on or off HT-EQ mode  
Selects the speaker system  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
SPKR A / B  
MULTI / CAT  
MUTE  
TUNER  
TAPE  
TUNER  
TAPE  
Turns on or off multi room  
Decreases the sound temporarily  
Turns on or off multi speaker  
AUX1  
AMP  
AUX1  
AMP  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
M-SPKR  
VOLUME 3/ 4  
INFO  
Adjusts the over all sound level  
Displays the current setting on the monitor  
Enters the "SETUP MENU"  
MENU  
Enters the "SETUP MENU"  
Confirms the setting in "SETUP MENU" mode  
Moves the cursor for setting in "SETUP MENU" mode  
ENTER  
CURSOR  
T.TONE / SET UP Enters the test tone menu  
EXIT  
Exits from SETUP MENU  
CH-SEL  
V-OFF  
ATT.  
Calls up SETUP MENU and adjusts speaker levels or 7.1ch input level  
Turns on or off video output  
Reduces the input level  
BASS 3/ 4  
TREBLE 3/ 4  
SOURCE  
Adjusts the tone control of low frequency sound  
Adjusts the tone control of high frequency sound  
Selects a particular source component  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS  
Press the desired SOURCE button.  
1.  
2. Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.  
• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.  
• It may not be possible to operate some models.  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD MODE)  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD (CD MODE)  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR MODE)  
SOURCE ON / OFF Turns the DVD player on and off  
SOURCE ON / OFF Turns the CD player on and off  
SOURCE ON / OFF Turns the VCR on and off  
0-9,+10  
LEARN  
SEND  
LEARN  
SEND  
LEARN  
SEND  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
0-9,+10  
CL  
Turns the DVD player off  
Turns the DVD player on  
Inputs the numeric  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
0-9  
Turns the CD player off  
Turns the CD player on  
Inputs the numeric  
Clears the inputting  
Programs  
Inputs the numeric  
Selects TV/VCR  
Clears the inputting  
LIP SYNC/INPUT  
CL  
MEMO  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
l/  
l/  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
Clears the inputting  
CL  
MEMO  
Calls up programming menu  
Selects VCR channel up or down  
Calls up the menu  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
AUTO  
dts  
AUTO  
dts  
MEMO  
INFO  
Calls up programming menu  
Displays the disc information  
Calls up the menu of DVD disc  
Enters the setting  
CH 3/ 4  
MENU  
ENTER  
BAND  
BAND  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
INFO  
MENU  
Scrolls the disc information  
Switches the display information  
Pause  
EX/ES  
EX/ES  
EX/ES  
MENU  
ENTER  
CURSOR  
Enters the setting  
Moves the cursor for setting in  
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
Pause  
Play  
Stop  
CURSOR  
7
8
9
A/D  
7
8
9
A/D  
7
8
9
A/D  
Moves the cursor for setting in  
Play  
Stop  
"On Screen Display" mode  
Exits the programming menu  
Record  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
CL  
MEMO  
CL  
MEMO  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
0
+10  
0
+10  
"On Screen Display" mode  
Enters the test tone menu  
Exits from SETUP MENU  
Calls up the setup menu of the  
EXIT  
REC  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
Previous/ Next  
Rewind/ Forward  
DISC+  
Skips forward or previous track  
Searchs forward or backward  
CD changer next disc  
T.TONE / SET UP  
EXIT  
T.Tone/Set up  
Pause  
Play  
Stop  
Pause  
Play  
Stop  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
INFO  
MENU  
INFO  
MENU  
INFO  
MENU  
DVD player  
Pause  
Previous / Next  
Rewind / Forward  
AUDIO  
Skips forward or previous track  
Searchs forward or backward  
Selects the audio language  
Pause  
Play  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Play  
Stop  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
Stop  
Previous/Next  
Skips forward or previous  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
chapter/track  
PRESET  
TUNING  
PRESET  
TUNING  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
Rewind/ Forward  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
Searchs forward or backward  
DVD changer next disc  
Selects the camera angle  
Selects the subtitle language  
Selects the audio language  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
CH-SEL  
CH-SEL  
CH-SEL  
SUBTITLE  
AUDIO  
BASS  
TREBLE  
BASS  
TREBLE  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TUNER  
TAPE  
TUNER  
TAPE  
TUNER  
TAPE  
AUX1  
AMP  
AUX1  
AMP  
AUX1  
AMP  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD RECORDER (CDR MODE)  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ MD DECK (MD MODE)  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE MODE)  
SOURCE ON / OFF Turns the CD recorder on and off  
SOURCE ON / OFF Turns the MD deck on and off  
SOURCE ON / OFF Turns the TAPE deck on and off  
LEARN  
SEND  
LEARN  
SEND  
LEARN  
SEND  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
0-9  
Turns the CD recorder off  
Turns the CD recorder on  
Inputs the numeric  
Clears the inputting  
Programs  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
0-9  
Turns the MD deck off  
Turns the MD deck on  
Inputs the numeric  
Clears the inputting  
Programs  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
0-9  
Turns the TAPE deck off  
Turns the TAPE deck on  
Inputs the numeric  
Clears the inputting  
Programs  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
l/  
l/  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
CL  
MEMO  
CL  
MEMO  
CL  
MEMO  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
AUTO  
dts  
AUTO  
dts  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
INFO  
MENU  
Scrolls the disc information  
Switches the display information  
Record  
MENU  
REC  
Switches the display information  
Record  
Pause  
REC  
Pause  
Record  
Pause  
EX/ES  
EX/ES  
EX/ES  
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
REC  
Pause  
Pause  
Play  
Play  
Stop  
Play  
Stop  
7
8
9
A/D  
7
8
9
A/D  
7
8
9
A/D  
Pause  
Play  
Play  
Stop  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
CL  
MEMO  
CL  
MEMO  
CL  
MEMO  
Play  
Stop  
Stop  
Previous / Next  
Rewind / Forward  
Previous / Next  
Rewind / Forward  
Skips forward or previous track  
Searchs forward or backward  
0
+10  
0
+10  
0
+10  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
Stop  
Skips forward or previous track  
Searchs forward or backward  
Skips forward or previous track  
Searchs forward or backward  
Previous / Next  
Rewind / Forward  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
INFO  
MENU  
INFO  
MENU  
INFO  
MENU  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
PRESET  
TUNING  
PRESET  
TUNING  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
CH-SEL  
CH-SEL  
CH-SEL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
BASS  
TREBLE  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TUNER  
TAPE  
TUNER  
TAPE  
TUNER  
TAPE  
AUX1  
AMP  
AUX1  
AMP  
AUX1  
AMP  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Importants:  
• Some codes may be not match your equipment.  
RESETTING THE CODE  
Press and hold down the SOURCE button for  
appliance which should be controlled and press  
SET button until the SEND indicator blinking  
twice.Then back light flushes.  
BASIC OPERATION  
NORMAL MODE  
2.  
3.  
In this case, you can use LEARN mode to store these  
codes.  
LEARN  
SEND  
LEARN  
SEND  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
• The preset codes do not cover full functions.  
If you need extra function, use LEARN mode to  
store extra function.  
(When operating Marantz AV equipment products)  
l/  
l/  
Aim the remote control at the appliance and  
slowly alternate between pressing CH+ button  
and the SOURCE ON/OFF button for the  
appliance.  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
This remote control is preset with a total of 12 types  
of remote codes, including Marantz TV (television),  
DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite broadcasting  
tuner), TUNER, CD, CD-R, MD, TAPE (tape deck),  
AUX1, AUX2, and AMP (amplifier).  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
1.  
AUTO  
dts  
AUTO  
dts  
1
2
3
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
• Wen the batteries are getting weak, the preset  
procedure is not successful.  
EX/ES  
4
5
6
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
CH-SEL  
7
8
9
A/D  
Stop when the appliance turns off.  
4.  
5.  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
BASS  
TREBLE  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
Learning is not necessary for Marantz products.You  
can use these products without setting any codes.  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
PROGRAMMING WITH THE 4-DIGIT CODE  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
TUNER  
TAPE  
2.  
1.  
AUX1  
AMP  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
INFO  
MENU  
CHECKING THE CODE  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
1. Press the SOURCE button.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
1.  
2.  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
CH-SEL  
For this example, press DVD.  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
l/  
BASS  
TREBLE  
Press and hold down the SOURCE button  
for appliance which should be controlled and  
press SET button until the SEND indicator  
blinking twice.  
EX/ES  
1.  
Pressing the SOURCE button once changes  
the remote control to the settings for the source  
that was pressed.  
To change the amplifier on other source, press  
the SOURCE button twice (double-click). The  
code is sent, and then the amplifier source  
changes to DVD.  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
LEARN  
SEND  
4
5
6
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
TUNER  
TAPE  
AUTO  
dts  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
3.  
4.  
1.  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
7
8
9
A/D  
AUX1  
AMP  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
EX/ES  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
CL  
MEMO  
4
5
6
0
+10  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
1.  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
AUTO  
dts  
Then back light flushes.  
7
8
9
A/D  
1
2
3
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
Press the below codes to reset.  
2.  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
Press and hold down the SOURCE button for the  
appliance which should be controlled and press  
SET button until the SEND indicator blinks twice.  
Then back light flushes.  
1.  
TV : 1000  
DVD : 2000  
VCR : 3000  
DSS : 4000  
CH-SEL  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
INFO  
MENU  
SETTING THE BACK LIGHT  
TUNER  
TAPE  
1.  
AUX1  
AMP  
2.  
ENTER  
Each time press the buttons, illuminate button 2  
seconds.  
2. Press the 4-digit code for appliance (code table  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
The indicator will blink twice.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
at the end of this book)  
To turn off back light, press and hold down the SET  
and OFF button until SEND indicator blinks twice.  
To turn on it again, press and hold down the SET and  
ON button until SEND indicator blinks twice.  
Initial is back light ON.  
Note:  
When the procedure is successful, the SEND  
indicator will blink twice.  
Press and hold down the SOURCE button for  
appliance which should be controlled and press  
SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice  
then back light flushes.  
1.  
After this procedure, the selected SOURCE button is  
set initial code.  
Note:  
If the indicator did not blink twice, then repeat steps 1  
through 2 and try entering the same code again.  
Press the INFO button.  
2.  
3.  
PRESET MODE  
The SEND indicator will blink twice.  
To view the code for first digit, press 1 once.  
SCANNING THE CODE TABLE  
(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment  
products)  
Wait 3 seconds, count the SEND indicator  
blinks (e.g. 3 blinks = 3) and write down the  
number.  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
This remote control is preset with remote control  
codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers.  
The preset codes are TV, VCR, DVD and DSS.  
Settings can be made in one of two ways.  
When the preset codes are set, the following codes  
are contained in the source button of the remote  
control.  
LEARN  
SEND  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
3.  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
EX/ES  
Note:  
2.  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
4
5
6
AUTO  
dts  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
If a code digit is “0”, the SEND indicator will not  
blink.  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
7
8
9
A/D  
EX/ES  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
4
5
6
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
3.  
5.  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
SUB TITLE  
AUDIO  
Repeat step three more times for remaining  
4.  
3
CH-SEL  
V-OFF  
ATT.  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
digits. Use 2 for the second digit, 3 for the third  
BASS  
TREBLE  
See the attached manufacturer number list for the  
preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and  
other settings.  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
digit, and 4 for the fourth digit.  
INFO  
MENU  
TUNER  
TAPE  
2.  
AUX1  
AMP  
ENTER  
Remote control  
source name  
TV  
Corresponding preset Device name  
code  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
TV  
DVD  
Television  
DVD player  
Video deck  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
Switch on the appliance which should be  
controlled.  
1.  
VCR  
SATELLITE  
Satellite broadcasting  
tuner equipment  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
LEARN MODE  
Select the button to be learned.  
3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.  
4.  
5.  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
This remote control is capable of learning and storing  
codes used by other remote controls that you already  
own.  
For codes which are not learned, the remote control  
will transmit either the Marantz preset codes from  
the initial settings, or remote codes from another  
manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set by the  
customer.  
• LEARN indicator lights up.  
l/  
• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the  
mode returns to LEARN mode.  
INFO  
MENU  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
AUTO  
dts  
ENTER  
1
2
3
To cancel the erasing operation, do not  
press ENTER button and simply touch any  
other button.  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
EX/ES  
Select the SOURCE button to select the button  
2.  
3.  
4
5
6
to be erased.  
INFO  
MENU  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
Press and hold the button of the original remote  
controller to learn until the SEND indicator  
blinks twice.  
ENTER  
TUNER  
TAPE  
The receiver sensor for the remote control signals is  
located at the top of the remote control.  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
AUX1  
AMP  
Notes:  
• When the SEND indicator blinks once,  
repeat this step.  
• When the memory of the RC5001SR is  
full, the LEARN and SEND indicators blink  
once. If you want to learn the code, you  
should erase other learned button.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
• This remote control is capable to learn around 60  
codes.  
4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET  
button.  
Press and hold down the SLEEP button and  
press the learned button twice to be erased.  
• When the batteries are getting weak , the learing  
procedure is not successful.  
• SEND indicator blinks twice and the mode  
returns to LEARN mode.  
Erasing the all SOURCES  
Press and hold down the SET and MENU  
buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.  
1.  
LEARNING PROCEDURE  
Repeat steps and to learn other buttons in  
6.  
4
5
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
same SOURCE.  
l/  
Place the remote controller so that its infrared  
1.  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
Repeat steps to to learn other SOURCE.  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
7.  
8.  
3 6  
signal transmitter is facing the infrared signal  
receiver on the Marantz remote controller at a  
distance of about 0.05 m (2 inches).  
l/  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
INFO  
MENU  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
When you have finished programming the  
remote controller, press the SET button, then  
LEARN indicator stops blinking and exits from  
the LEARN mode.  
1
2
3
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
ENTER  
1
2
3
To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET  
4.  
button.  
Press and hold down the SLEEP button and  
press POWER ON and POWER OFF button.  
• LEARN indicator lights.  
2.  
3.  
LEARN  
SEND  
Erasing the code by SOURCE  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
dts  
SURROUND  
0.05 m  
1. Press and hold down the SET and MENU  
buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
AUTO  
l/  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
Notes:  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
l/  
AUTO  
dts  
INFO  
MENU  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
SY  
ST  
EM  
• When the SEND indicator blinks once again, the  
transmitting code is unavailable for RC5001SR, or  
the transmitting signal is intercepted by noise.  
R
EM  
1
2
3
R
O
TE  
C
55  
00  
C
O
S
N
TR  
R
O
LL  
ER  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
1
2
3
ENTER  
Press ENTER button to continue erasing.  
• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the  
mode returns to LEARN mode.  
Press and hold down the SET and MENU  
buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
2.  
3.  
• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1  
minutes while in the LEARN mode, the remote  
controller automatically exits from the LEARN  
mode.  
2. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and  
press the learned SOURCE button twice to be  
erased.  
To cancel the erasing operation, do not  
press ENTER button and simply touch any  
other button.  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
l/  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
INFO  
MENU  
• LEARN indicator lights.  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES  
(RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)  
-
-
.
INFO  
MENU  
1
2
3
ENTER  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
BASS  
TREBLE  
l/  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
DSS  
MD  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
ENTER  
Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons,  
sources, and by all memory contents.  
Select the SOURCE button to select the  
TUNER  
TAPE  
CDR  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
AUTO  
dts  
EXIT  
SOURCE.  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
1
2
3
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
Erasing the code by buttons  
TUNER  
TAPE  
4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET  
Press and hold down the SET and MENU  
AUX1  
AMP  
1.  
button.  
buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
Note:  
Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code,  
or there will leave empty if the button has no factory  
preset code.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Surround left and right speakers  
When the SR6001 is used in surround operation,  
the preferred location for surround speakers is on  
the side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the  
listening position.  
CONNECTING SPEAKERS  
CONNECTIONS  
SPEAKER PLACEMENT  
Surround  
BACK  
Powered  
subwoofer  
FRONT A  
Left  
Passive  
subwoofer  
Power  
The center of the speaker should face into the  
room.  
The ideal surround speaker system for this unit is 7-  
speaker systems, using front left and right speakers,  
a center speaker, surround left and right speakers,  
a surround back left and right speakers, and a  
subwoofer.  
Right  
Left  
Right  
Amplifier  
INVERT  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
LEVEL  
BTL  
EXT.  
CONT.  
IN  
REMOTE CONT.  
MASTER SLAVE  
MIN  
MAX  
VIDEO/  
+5~13V DC  
SYSTEM OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Surround back left and right speakers  
Surround back speakers are required when a full 7.1-  
channel system is installed.  
FRONT B  
Left  
SPEAKER SYSTEM  
MINIMUM OHMS  
4
Right  
For best results we recommend that all front speakers  
be of the same type, with identical or similar driver  
units. This will deliver smooth pans across the front  
sound stage as the action moves from side to side.  
Your center channel speaker is very important as  
over 80 % of the dialog from a typical motion picture  
emanates from the center channel.  
It should possess similar sonic characteristics to the  
main speakers. Surround channel speakers need not  
be identical to the front channel speakers, but they  
should be of high quality.  
The surround center speaker is useful for playback  
of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of  
the benefits of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that  
surround channels are discrete full range, while they  
were frequency limited in earlier “Pro Logic” type  
systems.  
Bass effects are an important part of home theater.  
For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used  
as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction. If  
you have full range front speakers, however, they  
may be used in place of a subwoofer with proper  
setting of the switches in the menu system.  
Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind the  
listening position.  
The center of the speaker should face into the  
room.  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
)
DVD  
INPUT  
2
SURROUND  
BACK  
SPEAKER  
SYSTEMS  
MODEL NO. SR6001  
OUTPUT  
L
L
R
L
(
FM 75  
)
FRONT  
A
GND AM ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
C
B
C
R
CB  
/
C
R
C
B
/
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
Y
P
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
)
(
)
R
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
RS-232C  
(
INPUT 1 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 2 DSS  
)
Subwoofer  
HDMI  
Ver1.2  
MULTI SPEAKER  
/SPEAKER  
C
XM  
AC IN  
DSS  
(4) MONI. OUT  
TV(1) DVD(2)  
VCR(3)  
OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR  
TV(1)  
DVD  
(2)  
VCR(3)  
We recommend using a sub-woofer to have maximum  
bass effect. Sub-woofer bears only low frequency range  
so you can place it any where in the room.  
FRONT  
B
IN  
OUT  
R
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
VIDEO  
4
DC OUT  
DIGITAL IN  
5
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX.  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IN  
L
SL  
C
ON  
OFF  
CEN  
TER  
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
1
2
3
OPT.  
OUT  
L
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
SURR  
OUND  
L
HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS  
R
7.1CH  
IN  
R
FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.  
SURR BACK OHMS  
OHMS  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
:
6
-
8
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
FRONT A +  
B
:
8
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
(
)
AUX2  
AUDIO  
Front left and right speakers, and a center speaker  
Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the  
three front speakers at the same height, as best as  
possible.  
Surround left and right speakers, and surround  
back speaker  
Place the surround left, right and surround back  
speakers higher than your ears by about 70cm–1m.  
Also place the speakers at the same height, as best  
as possible.  
Right  
Surround  
Left  
Center  
Subwoofer  
Surround Left  
CONNECTING SPEAKER WIRE  
1.  
2.  
Front Left  
70cm  
1m  
Surround Back  
Left  
Strip away approx. 3/8 inch (10 mm) of wire  
insulation.  
1.  
2.  
3/8 inch  
(10 mm)  
Twist the bared wire ends tight, to prevent short  
circuits.  
Front Center  
3.  
4.  
5.  
0°  
Surround Back  
Right  
Loosen the knob by turning it counterclockwise.  
3.  
4.  
22°  
150°  
Insert the bare part of the wire into the hole in  
side of each terminal.  
30°  
135°  
110°  
Surround Right  
Front Right  
Tighten the knob by turning it clockwise to  
secure the wire.  
90°  
5.  
Front left and right speakers  
We recommend to set the front L and R speakers  
with 45-60 degrees from the listening position.  
Note:  
• Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left,  
right and the center speakers when the speakers are  
installed near the TV and the TV is a monitor type.  
Center speaker  
Align the front line of the center speaker with the front  
L/R speakers. Or place the center speaker a little  
backward from the line.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution:  
CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS  
Be sure to use speakers with the specified impedance as  
shown on the rear panel of this unit.  
Tape Deck  
CD recorder / MD deck  
To prevent damage to circuitry, do not let the bare  
speaker wires touch each other and do not let them  
touch any metal part  
OUT IN  
L
L
R
R
of this unit.  
• Do not touch the  
speaker terminals  
when the power is  
on. It may cause  
you to receive an  
electric shocks.  
OUT IN  
DIGITAL DIGITAL  
L
L
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
R
R
Analog Audio  
L
R
R
L
R
• Do not connect more than one speaker cable to one  
speaker terminal. Doing so may damage this unit.  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
OUTPUT  
Digital Audio (coaxial)  
Digital Audio (optical)  
Note:  
Be sure to connect the positive and negative cables for  
(
FM 75  
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
P
P
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
B
PR  
)
(
)
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
RS-232  
(
INPUT 1 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 2 DSS  
)
the speaker properly. If they are miss-connected, the  
signal phase will be reversed and the signal quality will  
be corrupted.  
HDMI  
Ver1.2  
XM  
DSS  
(4) MONI. OUT  
TV(1) DVD(2)  
VCR(3)  
OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR  
TV(1)  
DVD  
(2)  
VCR(3)  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
VIDEO  
4
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX.  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IN  
DC OUT  
DIGITAL IN  
5
L
SL  
C
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER  
1
2
3
OPT.  
OUT  
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
Use the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack to connect a  
powered subwoofer (power amplifier built in ).  
If your subwoofer is a passive type (power amplifier  
is not built in), connect a monaural power amplifier to  
the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack and connect the  
subwoofer to the amplifier.  
L
7.1CH  
IN  
R
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
(
)
AUX2  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack and  
the CD/CD RECORDER OUT jack is the same signal  
which is currently selected.  
Notes:  
• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an  
CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS  
• There are 5 digital inputs, 2 coaxial jacks and  
3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. You can use  
these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS  
bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital  
source components.  
external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder  
when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack  
of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.  
Caution:  
• Do not connect this unit and other components  
to mains power until all connections between  
components have been completed.  
• The digital signal jacks on the SR6001 conform  
to the EIA standard. If you use a cable that does  
not conform to this standard, the SR6001 may not  
function properly.  
• There is one digital output coaxial jack and one  
optical output jack on the rear panel. These jacks  
can be connected to a CD recorder, or a MD deck  
inputs, respectively.  
Notes:  
• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Incomplete  
connections may make noise.  
• Each type of audio jack works independently.  
Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are  
output through the corresponding digital and analog  
jacks, respectively.  
• Refer to the instructions for each component. To  
setup the digital audio format of DVD player, or  
other digital source’s connected to digital input  
jacks.  
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels  
properly.  
Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and  
white connectors are for the L (left) channel.  
• Use fiber optical cables (optical) for DIG-1,2,3  
input jacks. Use 75 ohms coaxial cables (for digital  
audio or video) for DIG-4, 5 input jacks.  
• Be sure to connect input and output properly.  
• Refer to the instructions for each component that is  
connected to this unit.  
You can designate the input for each digital input/  
output jacks according to your component. See  
page 29.  
• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with  
power cords and speaker cables this will result in  
generating a hum or other noise.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD player  
VIDEO PROJECTOR  
HDMI INPUT  
• When multiple components are connected to this  
receiver, turn power to unused components off to  
prevent interference between them.  
HDMI JACK  
This SR6001 has two HDMI inputs and one HDMI  
output. The unit can send digital video and audio  
signals from DVDs and other sources directly to a  
display. It minimizes signal degradation caused by  
analog conversion so that high quality images can  
be enjoyed.  
The SR6001 is also capable of converting analog  
videosignals(CompositeVideo,S-Video,Component  
Video) for HDMI output.  
• Disconnecting or connecting cables with the power  
on can damage the equipment. Turn the power off  
before disconnecting or connecting cables.  
HDMI OUTPUT  
• Some DVD-Audio disks disable downmixing.  
These types of disks are not played back correctly  
unless the left, center, right and surround left and  
right speakers, and subwoofer are connected.  
• If a DVD player that does not support HDMI 1.1  
is connected to the SR6001, multi channel PCM  
playback is not possible even with DVD-Audio  
disks.  
Select an input source from the OSD menu system.  
(See page 29, 40)  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
SURROUND  
BACK  
SPEAKER  
SYSTEMS  
MODEL NO. SR6001  
OUTPUT  
L
L
R
L
• If an Super Audio CD player that does not support  
HDMI 1.2 is connected to the receiver, DSD  
playback is not possible even with Super Audio  
CD.  
(
FM 75  
)
FRONT  
A
GND AM ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
Notes:  
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
P
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
PB  
PR  
)
(
)
R
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
RS-232C  
• When the HDMI output is connected to a display  
monitor that does not support HDCP, signals are not  
output. To view images in HDMI, it is necessary to  
connect to a display that supports HDCP.  
(
INPUT 1 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 2 DSS  
)
HDMI  
Ver1.2  
MULTI SPEAKER  
/SPEAKER C  
XM  
AC IN  
DSS  
(4) MONI. OUT  
TV(1) DVD(2)  
VCR(3)  
OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR  
TV(1)  
DVD  
(2)  
VCR(3)  
FRONT  
B
IN  
OUT  
(*DSD: Direct Stream Digital)  
R
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
VIDEO  
4
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX.  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IN  
DC OUT  
DIGITAL IN  
5
L
SL  
C
• If a DVD player or other device with DVI output  
is connected to the SR6001, a separate audio  
cable (optical-digital, coaxial digital or analog) is  
needed for the audio signals. In this case, select the  
connected audio input as explained in “1-1 FUNC  
INPUT SETUP”. (See page 29)  
• Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of 62  
kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI jack are  
not output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.  
ON  
OFF  
• There may be no image output if connected to a  
TV or display that is not compatible with the above  
format.  
CEN  
TER  
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
1
2
3
OPT.  
OUT  
L
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
SURR  
OUND  
• RefertotheinstructionmanualoftheTVordisplayto  
be connected to the SR6001 for detailed information  
regarding the HDMI terminal.  
L
R
7.1CH  
IN  
R
FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.  
SURR BACK : 6 - 8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
(
)
AUX2  
AUDIO  
* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
SATELLITE TUNER  
HDMI OUTPUT  
• Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the  
HDMI signal may be affected by noise.  
CONNECTING HDMI DEVICES  
An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect the  
HDMI jack on the SR6001 with the HDMI jack on a DVD  
player, TV, projector or other component. To transmit  
multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected player  
must support multichannel audio transmission through  
its HDMI jack.  
HDMI video streaming is compatible with DVI in  
principle. Therefore, it is possible to connect to a TV  
or monitor that has a DVI terminal using an HDMI-DVI  
conversion cable or plug. When connecting to a DVI  
terminal, connect the audio signal separately.  
Notes:  
• Some HDMI components can be controlled over the  
HDMI cable, but this receiver cannot control other  
components this way.  
• When connected to a monitor (i.e., TV, projector,  
etc.) that does not support HDCP, video and audio  
are not output.  
• DVI cables come with 24-pin and 29-pin plugs. This  
receiver supports 24-pin DVI-D cables; 29-pin DVI  
cables cannot connect to it.  
• Some source devices such as DVD players or set  
top box do not support HDMI repeater operations  
like those of the SR6001. In such case, pictures are  
not properly projected on monitors such as TVs and  
projectors.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS  
CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS  
There are 3 types of video jacks on the rear panel.  
VIDEO  
PROJECTOR  
VIDEO jack  
Satellite Tuner  
DVD player  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the  
conventional composite video signal.  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUT OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
Y
CB  
/PB  
CR  
/PR  
Y
CB  
/PB  
CR  
/PR  
L
R
S-VIDEO jack  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
The video signal is separated into luminance (Y) and  
color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack.The S-VIDEO  
signals enables high-quality color reproduction. If  
your video component has an S-VIDEO output, we  
recommend to use it. Connect the S-VIDEO output  
jack on your video component to the S-VIDEO input  
jack on the SR6001.  
L
R
L
R
L
R
(
)
(
)
DVD  
INPUT  
1
TV  
INPUT  
2
SURROUND  
BACK  
MODEL NO. SR6001  
OUTPUT  
L
(
FM 75  
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
C
B
/
C
R
/
CB  
/
C
R
/
C
B
/
P
C
R
/
Y
Y
Y
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
P
B
PR  
PB  
P
R
B
PR  
(
)
( )  
INPUT DSS  
OUTPUT  
R
INPUT  
3
VCR  
4
RS-232C  
Component jack  
(
)
(
)
INPUT  
1
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
HDMI  
Ver1.2  
MULTI SPEAKER  
/SPEAKER  
C
Make component video connections to a TV or  
monitor with component inputs to produce higher  
quality video images. Use a component video cable  
or 3 video cords to connect the component video out  
jacks on the SR6001 to the monitor.  
XM  
AC IN  
DSS  
(4) MONI. OUT  
TV(1) DVD(2)  
VCR(3)  
OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR  
TV(1)  
DVD  
(2)  
VCR(3)  
R
L
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL C  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX.  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IN  
DC OUT  
DIGITAL IN  
L
SL  
4
5
O
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
OUTPUT  
1
2
3
OPT.  
OUT  
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
C
L
(
FM 75  
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
7.1CH  
IN  
CB  
/
C
R
C
B
C
R
/
CB  
/
CR  
/
Y
/
Y
/
Y
P
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
)
(
)
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
RS-232C  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
(
INPUT 1 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 2 DSS  
)
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
(
)
AUDIO  
AUX2  
Notes:  
HDMI  
Ver1.2  
XM  
DSS  
(4) MONI. OUT  
TV(1) DVD(2)  
VCR(3)  
OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR  
TV(1)  
DVD  
(2)  
VCR(3)  
Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels  
properly.  
IN  
OUT  
L
R
L
R
R
L
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
VIDEO  
4
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX.  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IN  
DC OUT  
DIGITAL IN  
5
L
SL  
C
Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and  
white connectors are the for L (left) channel.  
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
1
2
3
OPT.  
OUT  
• Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the  
video signals properly.  
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
L
7.1CH  
IN  
L
R
L
R
If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to  
the S-VIDEO or component jack on the SR6001, it is  
not necessary to connect the conventional video signal  
to the VIDEO (composite) jack. If you use both video  
inputs, the SR6001 gives priority to the S-VIDEO  
signal.  
R
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
(
)
AUX2  
AUDIO  
AUDIO AUDIO  
OUT IN  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT IN  
OUT IN  
L
R
L
R
R
L
Video  
VCR  
• Each type of video jack works independently.  
Signals input to the VIDEO (composite) and S-  
VIDEO jacks or component are output to the  
corresponding VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO  
or component jacks, respectively.  
S-Video  
L
R
Analog Audio  
The SR6001 has the “TV-AUTO ON/OFF” function  
to turn the TV ON or OFF automatically, by sensing  
the incoming video signal from the VIDEO jacks.  
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
Digital Audio  
(coaxial)  
OUT  
IN  
• You may need to setup the digital audio output  
format of your DVD player, or other digital source  
components. Refer to the instructions of the each  
component connected to the digital input jacks.  
L
R
Digital Audio  
(optical)  
• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an  
external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder  
when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack  
of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.  
TV  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVANCED CONNECTING  
CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
OUTPUT  
( )  
FM 75  
GND AM ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
C
B
C
R
/
C
B
C
R
C
B
/
CR  
/
Y
/
Y
/
/
PR  
Y
P
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
P
B
PR  
R
L
R
L
R
L
)
(
)
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
(
INPUT 1 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 2 DSS  
)
HDMI  
Ver1.2  
DSS  
(4) MONI. OUT  
TV(1)  
DVD  
(2)  
VCR(3)  
(
UT 1 TV  
)
( )  
INPUT 2 DVD  
TV(1)  
DVD  
(2)  
VCR(3)  
OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR  
IN  
OUT  
MODEL NO  
R
L
R
L
R
L
OUTPUT  
DVD Audio player  
or  
Super Audio CD  
Multi channel player  
2
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX.  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IN  
DC OUT  
DIGITAL IN  
5
L
SL  
4
1
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
CB  
/
CR  
/
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
P
(
UT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
PB  
PR  
)
(
)
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
FLASHER  
IN  
RC OUT  
CENTER  
2
3
OPT.  
OUT  
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
S
XM  
L
AC  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
OPTION  
DSS(4)  
MONI. OUT  
TV(1)  
DVD(2)  
VCR  
(3)  
L
R
FRONT SURR. SURR.  
BACK  
SUB  
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
R
DC OUT  
L
SL  
C
WOOFER  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
S
N
(
)
AUX2  
AUDIO  
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
CENTER  
Power  
Amplifer  
T
L
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
E
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
R
1
7.1CH  
IN  
Subwoofer  
SURR.  
BACK  
SUB  
FRONT SURR.  
WOOFER  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
(
)
AUX2  
O
DVD player  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
CD player  
CD recorder  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
IN  
IN  
IN  
Front  
Right  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
Front  
Left  
Center  
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
Surround  
Left  
Surround  
Right  
Surround  
Back Left  
Surround  
Back Right  
q
w
You can control other Marantz products through the  
SR6001 with the remote control by connecting the  
REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit.  
Whenever external infrared sensors or similar devices  
are connected to RC-5 IN of the SR6001, be sure to  
always disable operation of the infrared sensor on the  
main unit by using the following procedure.  
CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO SOURCE  
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER  
The 7.1CH INPUT jacks are for multichannel audio  
source such as a Super Audio CD multichannel  
player, DVD audio player or external decoder.  
If you use these jacks, switch on the 7.1CH INPUT  
and set the 7.1CH INPUT level by using the SETUP  
MAIN MENU. See page 29.  
The PREOUT jacks are for connecting external  
power amplifiers.  
Be sure to connect each speaker to the corresponding  
external power amplifier.  
The signal transmitted from the remote control is  
received by the remote sensor on the SR6001. Then  
the signal is sent to the connected device through  
this terminal. Therefore you need to aim the remote  
control only at the SR6001. Also, if a Marantz power  
amplifier (some models excluded) is connected to  
one of these terminals, the power amplifier’s, power  
switch is synchronized with this unit’s power switch.  
Hold down the MULTI button and the MENU  
button on the front panel at the same time for  
five seconds.  
1.  
The setting “IR=ENABLE” is shown on the FL  
DISPLAY.  
2.  
Press the CURSOR buttons (1, 2) to change  
this to “IR=DISABLE”.  
3.  
Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the other  
units, (not the SR6001) to “EXT.” (external) to use  
this feature.  
Press the ENTER button. Once this setting is  
made, the infrared sensor on the main unit is  
disabled.  
4.  
Note:  
• Be sure to set to “IR=ENABLE” when external  
infrared sensors or similar devices are not connected.  
Otherwise, the main unit will be unable to receive  
remote control commands.  
To restore the original setting, perform steps 1  
to 4 to set to “IR=ENABLE”.  
5.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS  
CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS  
Connecting the supplied FM antenna  
The supplied FM antenna is for indoor use only.  
During use, extend the antenna and move it in various  
directions until the clearest signal is received.  
Fix it with push pins or similar implements in  
the position that will cause the least amount of  
distortion.  
AM Loop  
Antenna  
AM External  
Antenna  
FM Antenna  
FM External  
Antenna  
If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor  
antenna may improve the quality.  
Connecting the supplied AM loop antenna  
The supplied AM loop antenna is for indoor use  
only.  
Set it in the direction and position it to where you  
receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as  
possible from the unit, televisions, speaker cables,  
and power cords.  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
SURROUND  
BACK  
SPEAKER  
SYSTEMS  
MODEL NO. SR6001  
OUTPUT  
L
L
R
L
(
FM 75  
)
FRONT  
A
GND AM ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
R
CB  
/
CR  
/
Y
/
Y
IN
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
RS-232C  
(
INPUT 1 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 2 DS
H
Ver1.
MULTI SPEAKER  
/SPEAKER C  
XM  
AC IN  
) MONI. OUT  
TV(1) DVD(2)  
VCR(3)  
OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONIT
FRONT  
B
IN  
OU
R
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
VIDEO  
4
If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor  
antenna may improve the quality.  
DIGITAL IN  
5
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX.  
RC-
SL  
C
ON  
OFF  
CEN  
TER  
ANT  
GND AM  
PRE  
OUT  
)
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
75  
1
2
3
OPT.  
Press and hold down the lever of the AM antenna  
terminal.  
L
1.  
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
SURR  
OUND  
L
R
7.1CH  
IN  
R
Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal.  
FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.  
SURR BACK : 6 - 8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
2.  
3.  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
(
)
AUX2  
AUDIO  
Release the lever.  
Note:  
• Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the  
AM antenna GND terminal.  
ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA  
Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection  
line.  
Place the antenna on stable surface.  
CONNECTING AN FM OUTDOOR ANTENNA  
1.  
4.  
Notes:  
• Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon  
signs, busy roads, etc.).  
• Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep it  
well away from power lines, transformers, etc.  
• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,  
grounding is necessary.  
Bend the base part in the reverse direction.  
2.  
3.  
CONNECTING AN AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA  
An outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is  
stretched horizontally above a window or outside.  
Notes:  
• Do not remove the AM loop antenna.  
Insert the hook at the bottom of the loop part  
into the slot at the base part.  
• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,  
grounding is necessary.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
XM RADIO OVERVIEW  
CONNECTING THE XM CONNECT-AND-PLAY ANTENNA  
SR6001 is the XM Ready® receiver.You can receive XM Satellite Radio® by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner  
and Home Dock (sold separately) and subscribing the XM service.  
• Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into XM terminal on the rear panel.  
• Position the XM antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.  
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.  
Introducing XM Satellite Radio  
There’s a world of audio listening pleasure beyond AM and FM. XM Satellite Radio which includes:  
XM  
• Over 170 Digital Channels  
• The most commercial-free music in satellite radio  
• Live concerts plus exclusive original programming  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
MODEL NO. S
OUTPUT  
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
CB  
/
CR  
/
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
P
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
PB  
PR  
• The biggest names in news, talk, and entertainment  
• The most sports play-by-play  
)
(
)
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
RS-232C  
MULTI SPEAKER  
C
/SPEAKER  
XM  
AC IN  
DSS(4)  
MONI. OUT  
TV(1)  
DVD(2)  
VCR  
(3)  
• Major league Baseball. Every team. All season long.  
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
RC  
IN  
DC OUT  
L
SL  
C
MULTI SPEAKERON  
/SPEAKER  
SUB SPEAKER 6-8 OHMOSFF  
ON  
C
OFF  
:
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
OUT  
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
How to Subscribe  
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
7.1CH  
IN  
(800) 967-2346. Customers should have their Radio ID and credit card ready. The Radio ID can be found by  
selecting channel 0 on the radio.  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
(
)
AUX2  
AUDIO  
(See the “CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH AND RADIO ID”)  
Note  
A Warning Against Reverse Engineering  
• Keep the power supply cord unplugged until the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connection have been  
completed.  
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated  
in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio system.  
Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual  
property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The user of  
this or any other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile,  
reverse engineer, or disassemble the object code, or in any other way convert the object code into human-  
readable form. The software is licensed solely for use within this product.  
XM $ 12.95 monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required to  
receive XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time  
activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change.  
Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channle blocking is available for XM  
radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at  
xmradio.com. XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States. [XM Ready, XMDirect*] are  
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE  
CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM  
Bi-wire Connection  
A bi-wire connection is possible with speakers that  
have two sets of inputs (for treble and bass).  
This allows you to drive the treble and bass units  
with separate channel amps, which enables better  
sound quality. Connect the speakers as shown in the  
figure. Set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the  
rear panel to ON.  
(Multi room speaker)  
RIGHT  
SPEAKER  
LEFT  
SPEAKER  
Notes:  
• If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in the  
receiver will trip and set the receiver to standby.  
(The STANDBY indicator will flash.) In such case,  
recheck the connections between the speakers and  
the receiver.  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
SURROUND  
BACK  
SPEAKER  
SYSTEMS  
MODEL NO. SR6001  
OUTPUT  
L
L
R
L
( )  
FM 75  
FRONT  
A
GND AM ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
• Turn power to the receiver off before changing the  
setting of the SPEAKER C selector switch.  
CB  
/
C
R
C
B
C
R
CB  
/
CR  
/
Y
/
Y
/
/
Y
P
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
PB  
PR  
)
(
)
R
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
RS-232C  
(
INPUT 1 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 2 DSS  
)
HDMI  
Ver1.2  
MULTI SPEAKER  
/SPEAKER C  
• If the speaker is fitted with a shorting bar, remove the  
shorting bar.  
XM  
AC IN  
DSS  
(4) MONI. OUT  
TV(1) DVD(2)  
VCR(3)  
OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR  
TV(1)  
DVD  
(2)  
VCR(3)  
FRONT  
B
IN  
OUT  
R
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
VIDEO  
4
DIGITAL IN  
5
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX.  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IN  
DC OUT  
L
SL  
C
ON  
OFF  
CEN  
TER  
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
1
2
3
OPT.  
OUT  
L
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
SURR  
OUND  
L
SURROUND  
BACK  
SPEAKER  
SYSTEMS  
ODEL NO. SR6001  
R
7.1CH  
IN  
R
L
L
R
L
FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.  
SURR BACK : 6 - 8 OHMS  
HED  
0W  
ON  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
FRONT A + B : 8  
OHMS  
MULTIROOM MULTIROOM  
FRONT  
A
LETS  
0Hz  
(
)
OFF  
AUX2  
AUDIO  
LEFT  
RIGHT  
R
SPEAKER  
SPEAKER  
MULTI SPEAKER  
/SPEAKER C  
L
R
AC IN  
FRONT  
B
R
ON  
OFF  
CEN  
TER  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
R
L
L
SURR  
OUND  
R
L
B.CENTER.SURR.  
6 - 8 OHMS  
OHMS  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
R
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
RC IN FRONT  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN AMP  
(For multiroom)  
IR RECEIVER  
RC OUT  
RIGHT  
SPEAKER  
LEFT  
SPEAKER  
Note:  
You can use surround back speaker terminals as  
MULTI SPK. terminals or SPEAKER C terminal  
when you are not using surround back speakers.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT  
a
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
SURROUND  
BACK  
MODEL NO. SR6001  
OUTPUT  
L
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
CB  
/
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
MPONENT  
VIDEO  
P
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
B
PR  
P
B
PR  
PB  
PR  
)
(
)
R
INPUT 4 DSS  
OUTPUT  
RS-232C  
DMI  
er1.2  
MULTI SPEAKER  
/SPEAKER C  
XM  
AC IN  
( )  
DSS 4 MONI. OUT  
)
4
( )  
TV 1  
DVD(2)  
( )  
VCR 3  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
SBL  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IN  
DC OUT  
L
SL  
C
ON  
OFF  
AX.  
FLASHER  
IN  
PRE  
OUT  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
T.  
OUT  
R
L
SR  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
SW  
C
TAPE  
CD/CD-R  
MULTI  
7.1CH  
IN  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
SR  
SBR  
SW  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
(
)
AUX2  
AUDIO  
sd  
a RS232C  
Connect an external control device or other device for  
servicing. (Use a straight cable for the connection.)  
s DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)  
External devices can be controlled from the SR6001  
by connecting them to the DC OUT terminal (12 V).  
d FLASHER IN  
This receiver can be controlled by connecting a  
control box or other control device to this receiver.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RC5001SR BUTTON CONTROL  
SETUP  
After all components are connected, initial setup  
must be performed.  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
UP button  
ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM  
INFO  
MENU  
TheSR6001incorporatesanonscreenmenusystem,  
which makes various operations possible by using  
the cursor (3, 4, 1 , 2) and ENTER buttons on the  
remote control unit or on the front panel.  
MENU button  
Press this button to display the  
OSD menu system.  
LEFT button  
ENTER  
Note:  
RIGHT button  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
To view the onscreen displays, make certain you  
have connected the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear  
panel to the composite, S-Video, component video  
or HDMI input of your TV or projector. (See page  
19, 20)  
ENTER button  
EXIT  
EXIT button  
Press this button to exit the OSD  
menu system.  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
Press the AMP button on the remote control  
unit. (This step is not needed when operating  
the setup menus from the SR6001.)  
1.  
2.  
DOWN button  
Press the MENU button on the remote control  
or press the MENU button on the front panel.  
The “MAIN MENU” of the OSD menu system is  
displayed.  
There are 6 items in the MAIN MENU.  
SR6001 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL  
Select the desired sub-menu with the 3 or  
4
3.  
cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.  
The display will change to the selected sub-  
menu.  
UP button  
ENTER button  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
TUNER  
CD  
CDR  
MD  
Notes:  
• If you desire to adjust any sub-menu, you need to set  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
TAPE  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
it to UNLOCKED.  
HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
• To lock sub-menus, set items 1-6 on the MAIN  
MENU to “LOCKED”.  
ENTER  
LEFT button  
RIGHT button  
MENU  
EXIT  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
<LOCKING SUBMENUS>  
(1) Move the cursor to “1. INPUT SETUP” in the  
MAIN MENU.  
(2) Select the “0” mark left of “LOCKED” with the 1  
AMP (Amplifier) button  
or 2 cursor buttons.  
EXIT button  
MENU button  
Press this button to display the  
OSD menu system.  
Press this button to exit the  
OSD menu system.  
To exit from OSD menu system, press the  
EXITbutton, or move the cursor to EXIT and  
4.  
DOWN button  
press the ENTER button.  
Note:  
• Settings are entered with the ENTER button on the  
unit or the remote control unit.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
• After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2  
cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.  
MAIN MENU  
MAIN MENU  
1.INPUT SETUP  
2.SPKR  
3.SURR  
4.VIDEO SETUP  
5.PREFERENCE  
6.ACOUSTIC EQ  
SETUP  
SETUP  
LOCKED  
UNLOCK  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
SUB MENU  
1.INPUT SETUP  
FUNC INPUT SETUP  
7.1CH INPUT SETUP  
FUNCTION RENAME  
3.SURR SETUP  
CHANNEL LEVEL  
5.PREFERENCE  
MULTI ROOM SETUP  
DC TRIGGER SETUP  
PL x  
CS  
MUSIC PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
NEO:6 PARAMETER  
STANDBY  
: NORMAL  
BILINGUAL : MAIN+SUB  
HDMI AUDIO: THROUGH  
HT-EQ  
: OFF  
LFE LEVEL  
: -10dB  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
“1. INPUT SETUP” (P. 28)  
“3. SURROUND SETUP” (P. 37)  
“5. PREFERENCE” (P. 40)  
2.SPKR SETUP  
4.VIDEO SETUP  
VIDEO CONVERT  
6.ACOUSTIC EQ.  
EQ.MODE : OFF  
AUTO SETUP  
MANUAL SETUP  
.
TV AUTO  
:DISABLE  
:ENABLE  
:DISABLE  
PRESET G.EQ ADJ  
CHECK AUTO  
OSD  
I/P CONVERT  
INFO  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
“2. SPEAKER SETUP” (P. 31)  
“4. VIDEO SETUP” (P. 39)  
“6. ACOUSTIC EQ” (P. 42)  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.INPUT SETUP  
FUNC INPUT SETUP  
7.1CH INPUT SETUP  
FUNCTION RENAME  
1 INPUT SETUP  
This menu is for setting the matching the output of  
connected audio devices and the input jacks of this  
receiver.  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
FUNC INPUT SETUP :  
“1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP” (see page 29)  
P. 29  
P. 29  
P. 30  
7.1 CH INPUT SETUP :  
“1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” (see page 29)  
FUNC INPUT SETUP 1  
FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S  
7.1CH INPUT SETUP  
FUNCTION RENAME  
VIDEO-IN  
FRONT L  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R  
SURR.B L  
SURR. L  
SUB W  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LAST  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
FUNCTION: TV  
RENAME  
TV  
:AUTO  
1
2
3
4
F
-
1
-
2
-
1
2
3
4
-
1
2
3
4
: _T_V________  
FUNC RENAME :  
“1-3 FUNCTION RENAME” (see page 30)  
DVD :AUTO  
VCR :AUTO  
DSS :AUTO  
AUX1:AUTO  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV  
WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr  
stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$  
.
*
%&’() +, ./:;<=>?  
Select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN  
MENU with 3 or 4 cursor button, and press the  
_{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT  
1.  
RETURN  
NEXTT EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
ENTER button.  
1.INPUT SETUP  
FUNC INPUT SETUP  
7.1CH INPUT SETUP  
FUNCTION RENAME  
FUNC INPUT SETUP 2  
FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S  
TAPE:ANA  
CD/R:AUTO  
AUX2:ANA  
-
5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
3
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
BACK  
EXIT  
Select the desired sub-menu with the 3 or  
cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button.  
4
2.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDMI  
Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the  
device.  
1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP  
(ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)  
1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP  
Select desired channel with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
4.  
5.  
This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for 7.1-  
channel input sources.  
Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so  
that they are all heard by the listener at the same  
level.  
The 5 and F (Front) digital inputs can be assigned to  
a desired source.  
HDMI and COMPONENT inputs can be assigned to  
the preferred source.  
Use this menu to select which digital input jacks are  
to be assigned to which input source.  
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, adjust the  
volume level of each channel.  
Note:  
• When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and  
HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to  
THROUGH, audio is not output from the SR6001.  
(See page 40)  
Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and  
2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to go  
to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.  
Select “7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” from the  
1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
1.  
COMP  
Assign the number of a component video input  
jack to the device.  
Select “FUNC INPUT SETUP” from the  
1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
1.  
Note:  
7.1CH INPUT SETUP  
• The volume level can be set between -12 dB and  
+12 dB in 1 dB increments on all channels except the  
subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set from -18dB  
to +12 dB in 1 dB increments.  
VIDEO-IN  
FRONT L  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R  
SURR.B L  
SURR. L  
SUB W  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LAST  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
V/S  
FUNC INPUT SETUP 1  
FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S  
Assign the number of a composite video and S-  
video input jack to the device.  
TV  
:AUTO  
1
2
3
4
F
-
1
-
2
-
1
2
3
4
-
1
2
3
4
Note:  
DVD :AUTO  
VCR :AUTO  
DSS :AUTO  
AUX1:AUTO  
• Video and S-video can use the same numbers when  
assigning to input functions.  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
• The mark in AUX.1 indicates that other inputs  
cannot be assigned.  
Select “VIDEO-IN” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
2.  
3.  
RETURN  
NEXTT EXIT  
Press the ENTER button.  
3.  
4.  
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the  
video input source to be played through the  
MONITOR OUT jack.  
Select a setting with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor  
buttons, and assign a mode and input jack  
(DIG, HDMI, COMP, V/S).  
2.  
Select each mode setting and input terminal  
with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
The input source is switched by pressing the  
Press the ENTER button.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
MODE  
1
or 2 cursor buttons as follows;  
Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.  
AUTO:  
LAST TV DVD VCR DSS AUX1  
V-OFF LAST ...  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4,  
1, and 2 cursor buttons and then press the  
ENTER button to go to the next page.  
Select “AUTO”, for automatic detection of the  
digital input signal condition.  
If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog  
signal present, the analog signal will be played.  
"AUTO" is the initial setting of all input sources.  
Notes:  
When “LAST” is selected, the source is set to the  
source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was  
activated.  
FUNC INPUT SETUP 2  
FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S  
HDMI:  
Select “HDMI, when only a HDMI signal will be  
• When  
V-OFF” is selected, no signal is emitted from  
TAPE:ANA  
CD/R:AUTO  
AUX2:ANA  
-
5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
3
used  
.
MONITOR OUT jack.  
DIG:  
Select “DIG”, when only a digital signal will be  
used.  
ANA:  
RETURN  
BACK  
EXIT  
Select “ANA” for input sources for which no digital  
Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.  
input jacks are used.  
8.  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
move the cursor to “RETURNwith 3, 4, 1, and  
2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.  
DIG  
5 and F(Front) digital inputs can be assigned to a  
desired source.  
To return to the Func Input Setup 1 menu from  
the Func Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor  
to “BACK” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
Assign the number of a digital input jack to the  
device.  
Note:  
• Assignments cannot be made in sections with a ✽  
mark.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3 FUNCTION RENAME  
Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is input.  
9.  
Input sources can be registered under any name.  
This menu is for renaming input source.  
BACK:  
This menu is for renaming function name. Names  
can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces.  
(Characters are selected from those appearing on  
the display.) This name appears on the receiver's FL  
display and the OSD, but it does not appear in the  
OSD Setup menu.  
Deletes the character left of the cursor in the  
RENAME” area one character at a time.  
DEFAULT:  
Restores the name in the “RENAME” area to the  
name in the “FUNCTION” area.  
SPACE:  
InsertsaspaceatthecursorpointoftheRENAME”  
area.  
Select “FUNCTION RENAME” from the 1.  
INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
1.  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
Note:  
FUNCTION RENAME  
• RENAME cannot be left blank.  
FUNCTION: TV  
RENAME  
: _T_V________  
Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and  
2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go  
to the 1. INPUT SETUP menu.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV  
WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr  
stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$  
.
*
%&’() +, ./:;<=>?  
_{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
2.  
Select an input source with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
3.  
4.  
Select “RENAME” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
Move the cursor to the character (1st to 10th) to  
change with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
5.  
6.  
Move the cursor to the character list with the 4  
cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter “A”  
to begin with.)  
Select a character with the 3, 4, 1, and 2  
cursor buttons.  
7.  
8.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the selected  
letter.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.SPKR SETUP  
AUTO SETUP  
2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP  
MANUAL SETUP  
After you have installed the SR6001 connected all  
the components and determined the speaker layout,  
it is now time to perform the settings in the Speaker  
Setup menu for the optimum sound acoustics for  
your environment and speaker layout.  
Before you perform the following settings, it is  
important that you first determine the following  
characteristics:  
RETURN  
EXIT  
P. 32  
P. 35  
AUTO SETUP  
AUTO SETUP  
SPEAKER SIZE  
INI.SET SPKR: YES  
AUTO SETUP:  
“2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ Setup)”  
AUTO SETUP: START  
SUB W  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURR.  
SURR.B  
SURR.B SIZE : SMALL  
LPF/HPF  
BASS MIX  
: YES  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
: 2CH  
MAIN ROOM  
NOW ANALYZING!!  
CANCEL  
(see page 32)  
SURR BACK:  
2CH  
MANUAL SETUP:  
“2-2 MANUAL SETUP” (see page 35)  
: 80Hz  
:
RETURN  
EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
Select “2.SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU  
1.  
with 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
ENTER button.  
AUTO SETUP  
AUTO SETUP  
SPEAKER DISTANCE  
UNIT  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ft  
2.SPKR SETUP  
SPEAKERS CHECK:--  
NOW ANALYZING !!  
CANCEL  
FRONT L  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R  
SURR.B L  
SURR.L  
SUB W  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
______________  
AUTO SETUP  
MANUAL SETUP  
NOW CALCULATE !!  
EXIT  
RETURN  
BACK NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
EXIT  
AUTO SETUP  
CHECK RESULT  
SPEAKER LEVEL  
TEST MODE  
FRONT L  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R  
SURR.B L  
SURR.L  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MANUAL  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
Select the desired menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons, and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK  
SPEAKER CONFIG  
SPEAKER SIZE  
DISTANCE  
CHANNEL LEVEL  
CROSSOVER FREQ  
1ST MIC POSITION!!  
START  
CHECK  
Note:  
STORE  
• After you complete this the portion of the setup,  
press the ENTER button. The cursor will move to  
RETURN” and press the ENTER button to go to  
the Sub-menu.  
SUB W  
EXIT  
EXIT  
RETURN  
BACK  
EXIT  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
After confirming the check results, select  
RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button to return to the OSD  
menu.  
2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ SETUP)  
Detection Check  
5.  
• Measurement can be done in a maximum of 6  
listening positions.  
The AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ Setup) feature of  
the SR6001 measures sound characteristics of the  
speaker system and room where the receiver is used  
and automatically optimizes settings.  
During the detection check, the following OSD  
appears on the display and checks are made  
to detect dark sound in the listening room,  
whether there are speakers or not and polarity.  
For the first measurement, set the microphone in the  
main listening position.  
• Use a stand or tripod to position the microphone at  
ear height in the listening position.  
• Remove any obstructions between the speakers and  
microphone.  
• To use the internal subwoofer of the amp, set the  
volume to the middle point and set the crossover  
frequency to the highest.  
• Duringmeasurement,stepawayfromthemicrophone  
and operate the SR6001 via the remote control unit  
from a position that is out of the path of the speaker  
sound.  
• The test tone output from the speakers during  
measurement is loud. Be mindful of neighbors and  
watch out for small children.  
At this point, you can select “EXIT” to end Auto  
Setup and return to “2. SPKR SETUP”.  
AUTO SETUP  
SPEAKERS CHECK:--  
NOW ANALYZING !!  
CANCEL  
The Audyssey MultEQ™ technology adopted by the  
SR6001 provides the best listening environment for  
multiple listeners.  
To do this, the AUTO SETUP feature measures a  
test tone emitted by each channel in a maximum of 6  
listening positions, using the supplied microphone.  
The measurement results are analyzed using an  
original algorithm and environmental settings are  
made to improve the sound characteristics of the  
listening area.  
Calibration Check  
AUTO SETUP  
7.  
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK  
1ST MIC POSITION!!  
START  
CHECK  
EXIT  
Note:  
• The detection check measures the state of use of all  
speakers whether actually used or not.  
EXIT  
Note:  
For example, if the center speaker is not used, the  
test tone will require time to go from the L-channel  
to the R-channel, therefore be careful not to unplug  
the microphone or operate the SR6001 during this  
time.  
Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons  
and press the ENTER button to measure the  
first point (main listening position).  
• A special microphone (ACM1, option) is needed  
to use the Audyssey MultiEQ function. Contact a  
Marantz Authorized Dealer or Customer Support  
regarding purchase of this microphone.  
Either press the MultEQ™ button on the  
front panel of the SR6001 or select “2. SPKR  
SETUP” from the MAIN MENU, select “AUTO  
SETUP” with the 3/4 cursor buttons, and press  
the ENTER button to display the start screen.  
3.  
4.  
During measurement, the following OSD  
appears on the display. At this point, you can  
cancel measurement by selecting “CANCEL”  
with the 3/4 cursor buttons and pressing the  
ENTER button.  
To set up the speaker system (i.e., adjusting speaker  
distance, etc.) without using the AUTO SETUP feature,  
see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 35 of the manual.  
When the detection check ends, the following  
OSD appears on the display.  
6.  
Select the number of channels for the surround  
back speaker you are using.  
AUTO SETUP  
AUTO SETUP  
For a 5.1 channel speaker system, select  
“NON” (Surround Back speaker off). (To use  
speaker C or multi speaker, select “NON”. See  
page 24, 41.)  
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK  
HOW TO PERFORM AUTO SETUP  
During measurement, the OSD menu displays the  
condition, therefore turn power to the monitor on.  
1ST MIC POSITION!!  
START  
CHECK  
NOW ANALYZING!!  
CANCEL  
Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons  
and press the ENTER button to start  
measurement.  
Connect the supplied microphone to the MIC  
jack on the SR6001.  
1.  
EXIT  
EXIT  
AV  
SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
Here, to view the results of the detection check,  
select “CHECK” with the 3/4 cursor buttons  
and press the ENTER button. The results will  
be displayed.  
AUTO SETUP  
AUTO SETUP: START  
MAIN ROOM  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6
.
1
N
I
G
H
T
L
C
LFE  
S
R
When this measurement ends, the following  
OSD appears on the display  
A
AC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DOWN  
UP  
HT-EQ  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
AUX  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
AUTO SETUP  
SURR BACK:  
2CH  
SPEAKER CONFIG  
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK  
CHECK !!  
SPEAKER  
FRONT : YES  
2ND MIC POSITION!!  
START  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
: NON  
: YES  
: YES  
CALCULATE  
RETURN  
EXIT  
SURR.B R : NON  
SURR.B L : NON  
Set the microphone in the listening position.  
2.  
SURR.L  
SUB W  
: YES  
: YES  
EXIT  
RETURN  
EXIT  
Ifthecheckresultsindicateanerror,takesuitable  
action with that item and remeasure. (For error  
messages, see “ERROR MESSAGES” on  
page 34.)  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Example] Confirmation screen for speaker size and  
Note:  
Pressing “EXIT” prior to pressing “STORE” erases all  
8. Move the microphone to the second listening  
position, select “START” with the 3/4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button to  
measure the second point. At this point, you  
can cancel second point measurement and  
calculate measurement results by selecting  
CALCULATE” and pressing the ENTER  
button.  
Checking Measurement Results  
8.  
10.  
crossover frequency  
When calculations for the measurement results  
end, a screen appears for confirming the  
calculation results.  
measurement results and calculation results, therefore  
operate the remote control unit with care.  
SPEAKER SIZE  
FRONT L  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R  
SURR.B L  
SURR.L  
: AUTO  
: AUTO  
: AUTO  
: AUTO  
: AUTO  
: AUTO  
: AUTO  
: AUTO  
CHECK RESULT  
When storing operations end, the following OSD  
appears on the display.  
SPEAKER CONFIG  
SPEAKER SIZE  
DISTANCE  
CHANNEL LEVEL  
CROSSOVER FREQ  
2.SPKR SETUP  
SUB W  
AUTO SETUP  
MANUAL SETUP  
AUTO SETUP  
RETURN  
NEXT  
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK  
STORE  
2ND MIC POSITION!!  
START  
CROSSOVER FREQ  
EXIT  
CALCULATE  
FRONT  
: AUTO  
Select items to check with the 3/4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button to enter  
them.  
CENTER : AUTO  
RETURN  
EXIT  
SURR  
: AUTO  
SURR.B : AUTO  
EXIT  
Note:  
Note:  
Repeat steps 7 and 8 until measuring 6  
points between the main listening position and  
surrounding positions.  
9.  
To check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, see page  
43.  
• Do not turn the power to the SR6001 off while  
storing parameters in memory. This may erase all  
data in the SR6001’s memory and may damage the  
receiver.  
RETURN  
* AUTO is displayed to indicate that the speaker size  
andcrossoverfrequencyresultswereautomatically  
measured.  
When all measurements end, the following  
OSD appears on the display.  
[Example] Confirmation screen for speaker detection  
SPEAKER CONFIG  
CHECK !!  
SPEAKER  
AUTO SETUP  
FRONT : YES  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R : NON  
SURR.B L : NON  
: NON  
: YES  
: YES  
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK  
Storing Measurement Results in Memory  
11.  
Once finished confirming the measurement  
results, select “RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button to display  
the CHECK RESULT screen.  
CALCULATE  
SURR.L  
SUB W  
: YES  
: YES  
RETURN  
NEXT  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
LEVEL  
FRONT L  
:
:
:
:
:
0.0dB  
[Example] Confirmation screen for the distance from  
Select “CALCULATE” with the 3/4 cursor  
buttonsandpresstheENTERbuttontocalculate  
measurement results. During calculations, the  
following OSD appears on the display.  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R  
SURR.B L  
SURR.L  
SUB W  
-6.5dB  
-1.5dB  
+1.0dB  
+9.5dB  
speakers to the listening position  
DISTANCE  
UNIT  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ft  
: +12.0dB  
-2.5dB  
FRONT L  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R  
SURR.B L  
SURR.L  
SUB W  
30.00ft  
19.33ft  
29.66ft  
21.50ft  
12.33ft  
11.66ft  
16.33ft  
12.50ft  
:
: -12.5dB  
AUTO SETUP  
RETURN  
NEXT  
______________  
NOW CALCULATE !!  
CHECK RESULT  
RETURN  
NEXT  
SPEAKER CONFIG  
SPEAKER SIZE  
DISTANCE  
CHANNEL LEVEL  
CROSSOVER FREQ  
* The units can be changed by moving the cursor to  
[ft] of UNIT and pressing 1 / 2 the cursor buttons.  
Each time a 1 / 2 cursor button is pressed, the units  
alternate between [ft] (feet) and [m] (meters).  
EXIT  
Note:  
STORE  
• Less than 6 positions can be measured, but it is  
recommended to measure in all 6 positions in order  
to obtain the best results.  
EXIT  
• The time needed to complete calculations depends  
on the number of connected speakers and measured  
listening positions. The more speakers and listening  
positions, the more time is needed.  
Place the cursor on “STORE” and press  
the ENTER button to store all parameters  
including the equalizer parameters in memory.  
If not wanting to store the calculation results in  
memory, place the cursor on “EXIT” and press  
the ENTER button.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ERROR MESSAGES  
Displayed Error  
Cause  
How to Remedy  
• Connect the included microphone.  
MIC SET ERROR!!  
• The microphone is not properly connected.  
AUTO SETUP  
AUTO SETUP: START  
MAIN ROOM  
• Check the microphone connection.  
SURR BACK:  
2CH  
MIC SET ERROR!!  
RETURN  
EXIT  
NOISE ERROR!!  
• There is too much noise in the listening room to measure properly.  
• Volume from the speakers is low.  
• During measurement, turn off devices that make noise such as air  
conditioners.  
AUTO SETUP  
• Measure at a time when the surrounding area is quiet.  
SPEAKERS CHECK:  
NOISE ERROR !!  
RETURN  
EXIT  
ANALYZE ERROR!!  
• The speakers required for suitable playback were not detected.  
• Speaker polarity is connected backwards.  
• Check the speaker that is indicated as having reversed polarity  
AUTO SETUP  
([REV] can appear with some speakers even when properly  
connected. In such case, ignore the error indication.)  
SPEAKERS CHECK:  
• Check speaker direction and layout  
ANALYZE ERROR !!  
In the examples at left, the following trouble is detected.  
• The polarity of the left and right channels of the front speakers is  
backwards ([REV] appears on the display.)  
• The surround speaker is not connected ([NON] is displayed), but  
the surround back speaker is connected  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
* Under ANALYZE ERROR, select “NEXT” with the 3/4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button. A detail screen like the  
following appears on the display.  
(In this kind of situation, [ERR] is displayed for all surround and  
surround back speakers.)  
SPEAKER CONFIG  
CHECK !!  
SPEAKER  
FRONT L : YES  
REV  
An error is indicated in addition to the above if the speakers are  
connected as follows.  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
: NON  
: YES  
: NON ERR  
REV  
• When using just one surround back speaker, but it is connected to  
the surround back R-channel  
SURR.B R : YES ERR  
SURR.B L : YES ERR  
SURR.L  
SUB W  
: NON ERR  
: YES  
(To use just one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-  
channel.)  
RETURN  
EXIT  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUB W  
SURR. BACK SIZE  
2-2 MANUAL SETUP  
<SPEAKER DISTANCE>  
YES:  
LARGE:  
SPEAKER DISTANCE  
Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN  
MENU.  
Select when a subwoofer is connected.  
Select if the surround back speakers are large.  
SMALL:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
UNIT  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ft  
NO:  
FRONT L  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R  
SURR.B L  
SURR.L  
SUB W  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
10.0 ft  
Select when a subwoofer is not connected.  
Select if the surround back speakers are small.  
Select “MANUAL SETUP” with the 3 or  
4
Note:  
cursor buttons.  
FRONT  
LARGE:  
• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then  
this setting is not available.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Select if the front speakers are large.  
RETURN  
BACK NEXT EXIT  
SMALL:  
LPF/HPF  
<SPEAKER SIZE>  
Select if the front speakers are small.  
When you use a subwoofer, you can select the cutoff  
frequency for the small speakers used. Select one of  
the crossover frequency levels according to the size  
of the small speakers connected.  
60Hz 80Hz 100Hz 120Hz 140Hz →  
160Hz 180Hz  
Use this menu to specify the distance of each  
speaker’s position from the listening position. The  
delay time is automatically calculated according to  
these distances.  
Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly  
used seating position in the room.  
This is important for the timing of the acoustics to  
create the proper sound space that the SR6001 and  
today’s sound systems are able to produce.  
• If “NO” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then  
this setting is fixed at “LARGE”.  
SPEAKER SIZE  
INI.SET SPKR: YES  
SUB W  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURR.  
SURR.B  
: YES  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
: 2CH  
CENTER  
NONE:  
Select if no center speaker is connected.  
LARGE:  
Select if the center speaker is large.  
SMALL:  
Select if the center speaker is small.  
SURR.B SIZE : SMALL  
LPF/HPF  
BASS MIX  
: 80Hz  
:
Note:  
• If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher  
frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly  
lower frequency.  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
Note:  
When setting the speaker size in the SPEAKER SIZE  
menu, use the guidelines below.  
INI. SET SPKR (Initial Setting Speaker):  
Setting this to YES allows the following settings  
to be restored. To change the settings, select  
CUSTOM.”  
• For speakers for which you have selected “NONE”,  
the speaker configuration sub-menu will not appear  
here. (There are several useful books and special  
DVD and LD’s available to guide you through proper  
home theater configuration. If you are unsure, have  
your Marantz dealer perform the installation for you.  
They are trained professionals familiar with even  
the most sophisticated custom installations. Marantz  
recommends the www.cedia.org website for further  
information.)  
BASS MIX  
SURR.  
NONE:  
• The bass mix setting is only valid when “LARGE”  
is set for the front speakers and “YES” is set for the  
subwoofer during stereo playback.  
Select if no surround left and right speakers are  
connected.  
LARGE:  
Select if the surround left and right speakers are  
large.  
This setting has effect only during playback of  
PCM or analog stereo sources.  
• The front, center and surround speaker size  
should be “SMALL”.  
• When BOTH” is selected, the low frequencies will  
be played through the main L&R speakers and the  
subwoofer.  
• The subwoofer should be “YES”.  
SMALL:  
• LPF/HPF (the crossover frequency) should be  
80Hz”.  
Select if the surround left and right speakers are  
small.  
In this playback mode, the low frequency range  
expands more uniformly throughout the room, but  
depending on the size and shape of the room,  
interference may result in a decrease of the actual  
volume of the low frequency range.  
Select either m (meters) or ft (feet) for UNIT  
with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
8.  
LARGE:  
SURR. B  
NONE:  
Select if no surround back left and right speakers  
are connected.  
2CH:  
Select if the surround back left and right speakers  
are connected.  
1CH:  
Select each speaker with the 3 or 4 cursor  
The complete frequency range for the channel you  
are setting will be output from the speaker.  
SMALL:  
Frequencies of the channel you are setting that  
are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from  
the subwoofer.  
If the SUB. W is set to “NONE” and the front  
speakers are set to “LARGE,then the sound will  
be output from both the left and right speakers.  
9.  
buttons.  
Set the distance for each speaker , press the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons.  
• By selecting “MIX”, the low frequencies will play  
through the main L&R only.  
10.  
Note:  
FRONT L:  
• LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or  
DTS will be played through the subwoofer.  
Set the distance from the front left speaker to your  
normal listening position.  
Select if one surround back speaker is connected.  
In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the  
SURR BACK LEFT output terminal.  
CENTER:  
Set the distance from the center speaker to your  
normal listening position.  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and  
7.  
Notes:  
Select each speaker with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
4.  
FRONT R:  
2
cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to  
• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then  
this setting is fixed to “NONE.”  
Set the distance from the front right speaker to  
your normal listening position.  
SURR. L:  
Set the distance from the surround left speaker to  
your normal listening position.  
SURR. R:  
go to the next page.  
Set the size of each speaker with the 1 or  
2
5.  
6.  
cursor buttons.  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and  
2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button  
to go to the next page.  
Set the distance from the surround right speaker to  
your normal listening position.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUB W:  
Set the distance from the subwoofer to your  
normal listening position.  
TEST MODE:  
Select “MANUAL” or “AUTO” generation of the test  
tone with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
SURR. B L:  
Set the distance from the surround back left  
speaker to your normal listening position.  
SURR. B R:  
If you select “AUTO”, the test tone will be cycled  
through in a circular pattern beginning at Left →  
Center Right Surround Right Surround  
Back Right Surround Back Left Surround  
Left Subwoofer Left, in 2 seconds increments  
for each channel.  
Set the distance from the surround back right  
speaker to your normal listening position.  
Notes:  
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, adjust the volume  
level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the  
same level for all the speakers.  
• Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or feet  
(ft) as follows.  
m: 0.03 - 9.15 m in 0.03 m steps  
ft: 0.1 - 30.0 ft in 0.1 ft steps  
If you select “MANUAL”, adjust the output level of  
each speaker as listed below.  
(The values appearing on the FL display are  
approximate.)  
• For the speakers that you have selected “NONE” the  
Move the cursor to FRONT L by pressing the  
4 cursor button. The SR6001 will emit a pink  
noise from the front left speaker.  
12.  
speaker size menu will not appear.  
• The setting for surr.back L and surr.back R appears  
if it is set, two surround back speakers in the  
SPEAKER SIZE menu.  
Remember the level of this noise and then  
press the 4 cursor button.  
• The setting of SURR. BACK appears if it is set for  
one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE  
menu.  
(Note that this can be adjusted to any level  
between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)  
The SR6001 will now emit the pink noise from  
the center speaker.  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
11.  
move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and  
2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button  
to go to the next page.  
Using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons, adjust the  
13.  
volume level of the noise from the center  
speaker so that it is the same level as the front  
left speaker.  
<SPEAKER LEVEL>  
Press the 4 cursor button again. The SR6001  
will now emit the pink noise from the front right  
speaker.  
14.  
S PEAKER LEVEL  
TES T MODE  
FRONT L  
CENTER  
FRONT R  
S URR.R  
S URR.B R  
S URR.B L  
S URR.L  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MANUAL  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the front right and  
other speakers until all speakers are adjusted  
to the same volume level.  
15.  
S UB W  
After you complete this portion of the setup, press the  
ENTERbuttontomovethecursortoRETURN”.Press  
the ENTER button to go to “2. SPKR SETUP”.  
RETURN  
BACK  
EXIT  
Here you can set the volume for each speaker so that  
they are all heard by the listener at the same level.  
We recommend holding a dB SPL (Sound Pressure  
Level) meter at the listening position, at arms length,  
and pointing straight up at the ceiling, adjust the level  
of each speaker in turn unit it reads 75dB SPL when  
the meter is set to “C” weighting and Slow responce.  
Notes:  
• Speakers for which you selected “NONE” in the  
SPEAKER SIZE menu will not appear.  
• Surr. Back L and Surr. Back R appear if it is set for  
two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER SIZE  
menu.  
• Surr. Back appears if it is set for one surround back  
speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.  
Note:  
• To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input  
sources, you will need to use the 7.1 Ch Input sub  
menu. (See page 37)  
• The speaker level settings are not available in 7.1  
Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and Source  
Direct mode.  
• SUB W can be set from –18dB to +12dB.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.SURR SETUP  
3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL  
3 SURROUND SETUP  
CHANNEL LEVEL  
PL x MUSIC PARAMETER  
CS PARAMETER  
NEO:6 PARAMETER  
Select “3. SURR SETUP” from MAIN MENU  
with 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
1.  
This menu is for setting surround effect parameters  
for the various surround input signals so as to bring  
out the live audio effect of your speaker system.  
ENTER button.  
HT-EQ  
LFE LEVEL  
: OFF  
:
CHANNEL LEVEL:  
Select “CHANNEL LEVEL” with the 3 or  
cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.  
4
2.  
3.  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
“3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL (see page 37)  
PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER:  
“3-2 PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER” (see page 38)  
Set the SURR. MODE with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
P. 37  
P. 38  
CSII PARAMETER:  
CHANNEL  
SURR.MODE:  
AUTO  
LEVEL  
CS  
PARAMETER  
: 0  
“3-3 CSII PARAMETER” (see page 38)  
CHANNEL  
SURR.MODE:  
AUTO  
LEVEL  
NEO:6 PARAMETER:  
TRUBASS  
SRS DIALOG : 0  
CENTER  
SURR.R  
SURR.B R  
SURR.B L  
SURR.L  
SUB W  
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
“3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER” (see page 38)  
CENTER  
SURR.L  
SURR.R  
SURR.BACK L  
SURR.BACK R  
SUB W  
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
Select “3. SURR SETUP” from the MAIN  
MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press  
the ENTER button.  
1.  
RETURN  
EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
EXIT  
Select the desired menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
P. 38  
P. 38  
Select the desired menu item with the 3 or  
4
4.  
PL x MUSIC PARAMETER  
NEO:6 PARAMETER  
cursor buttons, set the desired level with the  
or 2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER  
button.  
3.SURR SETUP  
1
PARAMETER  
:DEFAULT  
CENTER GAIN : 0.3  
CHANNEL LEVEL  
PL x MUSIC PARAMETER  
PANORAMA  
DIMENSION  
CENTER WIDTH: 3  
:OFF  
: 0  
CS  
PARAMETER  
NEO:6 PARAMETER  
SURROUND MODE:  
HT-EQ  
LFE LEVEL  
: OFF  
:
The surround mode can be independently set for  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
3 modes.  
1. Multi Ch STEREO  
2. CSII  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
HT-EQ:  
3. Others  
Select to active the HT-EQ with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
Note:  
• After you complete this portion of the setup,  
press the ENTER button to move the cursor to  
RETURN” and press the ENTER button again to  
go to sub-menu.  
CHANNEL LEVEL  
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be  
excessively bright and harsh when played back  
over audio equipment in the home. This is because  
film soundtracks were designed to be played back  
in large movie theater environments.  
Activating the HT-EQ feature when watching a film  
made for movie theaters corrects this and restores  
the correct tonal balance.  
The HT-EQ feature is available except in the  
following modes.  
• 7.1 CH INPUT  
• PURE-DIRECT  
CENTER LEVEL:  
Set the effect level of the center speaker between  
–12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will  
not appear.  
SURR L or R LEVEL:  
Set the effect level of the Surround speaker  
between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
• If “NONE” was selected for the surround speakers  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will  
not appear.  
• When Dolby Virtual Speaker is set for the  
surround mode  
LFE LEVEL:  
SURR. BACK L or R LEVEL:  
Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker  
between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
• If “NONE” was selected for the surround back  
speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this  
setting will not appear.  
Select the output level of the LFE signal included in  
the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal.  
Select “0dB”, “–10 dB” or “OFF” with 1 or 2 cursor  
button.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, 2 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUB W LEVEL:  
Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker  
between –18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
• If “NONE” was selected for the subwoofer speaker  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will  
not appear.  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting  
cannot be selected.  
3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER  
3-2 PLIIx (PRO LOGIC IIx) MUSIC PARAMETER  
The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1  
channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also  
supports 5.1 channel input.)  
This mode expands the sound image from the center  
channel.  
Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and  
enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources  
such as CDs.  
In this mode, the SR6001 includes three controls to  
fine-tune the sound field as follows.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
Note:  
• Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo or  
CSIIwill affect the speaker level as explained in “2-2  
MANUAL SETUP”.  
3-3 CSII PARAMETER  
Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN  
MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press  
the ENTER button.  
Select “3. SURR SETUP” in MAIN MENU with  
1.  
1.  
3
or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER  
Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN  
MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press  
1.  
button.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move the  
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button to go to the 3.  
SURR SETUP menu.  
the ENTER button.  
Select “NEO:6 PARAMETER” with the 3 or  
4
Select “PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER” with the 3  
or 4 cursor buttons.  
2.  
3.  
2.  
3.  
cursor buttons.  
Select “CS II PARAMETER” with the 3 or  
cursor buttons.  
4
2.  
3.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
NEO:6 PARAMETER  
PL x MUSIC PARAMETER  
CS  
PARAMETER  
CENTER GAIN : 0.3  
PARAMETER  
:DEFAULT  
PANORAMA  
DIMENSION  
CENTER WIDTH: 3  
:OFF  
: 0  
TRUBASS  
SRS DIALOG : 0  
: 0  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
PARAMETER:  
Select “DEFAULT” or “CUSTOM” with the 1 or 2  
cursor buttons.  
If you select “CUSTOM”, you can adjust three  
parameters as listed below.  
Set the CENTER GAIN level between 0.0 and  
1.0 in 0.1 level increments with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
4.  
TRUBASS:  
Set the TRUBASS level between 0 and 6 in 1- level  
increments with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
TRUBASS produced by the speakers are an octave  
below the actual physical capabilities of the speakers  
adding exciting, deeper bass effects.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
PANORAMA:  
Select the PANORAMA mode “ON” or “OFF” with  
the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right  
speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.  
SRS DIALOG:  
Set the SRS DIALOG level between 0 and 6 in 1-  
increments with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
This can be popped out of the surround audio  
effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what  
the actors say.  
Notes:  
DIMENSION:  
• This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6-Music  
mode.  
Set the DIMENSION level between 0 and 6 level in  
1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
Adjust the sound field either towards the front or  
towards the rear.  
• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting is  
disabled.  
If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting  
cannot be selected.  
This can be useful to help achieve a more  
suitable balance from all the speakers with certain  
recordings.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
CENTER WIDTH:  
Set the CENTER WIDTH level between 0 and 7 in  
1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
Center width allows you to gradually spread the  
center channel sound into the front left and right  
speakers.  
Note:  
• This parameter can only be set in the CSIImode.  
At its widest setting, all the sound from the center  
is mixed into the left and right speakers.  
This control may help achieve a more spacious  
sound or a better blend for the front image.  
If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 VIDEO CONVERT  
4 VIDEO SETUP  
The SR6001 is equipped to convert video signals for  
monitor output.  
Video settings are made as follows.  
This section explains how to set up conversion for  
each type of video input.  
Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN  
MENU with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press  
1.  
the ENTER button.  
Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN  
MENU with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press  
the ENTER button.  
1.  
4.VIDEO SETUP  
VIDEO CONVERT  
.
TV AUTO  
:DISABLE  
:ENABLE  
:ENABLE  
OSD  
INFO  
I/P CONVERT  
Select “VIDEO CONVERT” with the 3 / 4  
cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
VIDEO CONVERT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
AUX1  
TAPE  
CD/R  
AUX2  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ANA&HDMI  
ANA&HDMI  
ANA&HDMI  
ANA&HDMI  
ANA&HDMI  
ANA&HDMI  
ANA&HDMI  
ANA&HDMI  
Select the desired menu with the 3/4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
VIDEO CONVERT  
“4-1 VIDEO CONVERT”  
TV-AUTO  
RETURN  
BACK  
EXIT  
Select the TV AUTO ON/OFF function to enable  
or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. (refer to  
page 50)  
Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 / 4 cursor  
buttons and set the video conversion mode  
with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons  
3.  
OSD INFO  
Select the OSD information function to “ENABLE”  
or “DISABLE” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
If you select “ENABLE”, the SR6001 will display  
the status of the feature (Volume up/down, input  
select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire  
this information, select “DISABLE”.  
ANA&HDMI:  
This mode both up-converts and down-converts  
analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,  
Component Video). Furthermore, it up-converts  
from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot down-  
convert from HDMI digital video signals to analog  
video signals.)  
Note:  
• OSD information is not output to Monitor Output  
ANA ONLY:  
This mode both up-converts and down-converts  
analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,  
Component Video). It does not up-convert to  
HDMI.  
of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD  
information is output if the Video Convert function  
is used to output Video or S-Video video signals to  
Monitor Out of HDMI and Component Video.  
OFF:  
For details, refer to“VIDEO CONVERT”on page 45.  
This mode turns off all conversion features.  
Note:  
• For details on video convert feature, see page 45.  
IP CONVERT  
Select the IP CONVERT ON/OFF function to  
enable or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
(refer to page 45)  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.PREFERENCE  
5 PREFERENCE  
MULTI ROOM SETUP  
DC TRIGGER SETUP  
MULTI ROOM SETUP :  
STANDBY  
BILINGUAL : MAIN  
HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE  
: NORMAL  
“5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP” (see page 41)  
DC TRIGGER SETUP :  
“5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP” (see page 41)  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
1.  
ENTER button.  
DC TRIGGER SETUP  
DC TRIG:DISABLE  
MULTI ROOM SETUP  
5.PREFERENCE  
AUDIO  
SLEEP  
:DVD  
:OFF  
TV  
:
:
:
:
TAPE  
CD/R  
AUX2  
TUNER :  
7.1CH :  
:
:
:
MULTI ROOM SETUP  
DC TRIGGER SETUP  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
MONO/ST:STEREO  
MULT:OFF  
VOL :VARI  
MSPK:  
VOL :  
STANDBY  
BILINGUAL : MAIN  
HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE  
: NORMAL  
AUX1 :  
LEV :-90dB LEV :  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
BACK  
EXIT  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
Select the desired menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
STAND BY:  
When this is set to “ECONOMY”, you can reduce  
the power consumption when the unit is in the  
Standby mode. When “ECONOMY” is selected,  
TV AUTO” and “RS-232C” are disabled when the  
unit is in the Standby mode.  
BILINGUAL:  
In the Bilingual mode, Dolby Digital and DTS  
output is set to either “MAIN” or “SUB”. Select  
BILINGUAL” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, then  
select MAIN SUB MAIN+SUB with the 1 or  
2 cursor buttons.  
HDMI AUDIO:  
This setting determines whether to play back audio  
input to the HDMI jacks through the SR6001 or  
output it through the receiver to a TV or projector.  
ENABLE: The audio input to the HDMI jacks  
can be played back by this receiver.  
In such case, audio signals are not  
output to the TV or projector.  
THROUGH: The audio input to the HDMI jacks is  
not output from the speaker terminals  
of the SR6001. Audio data is output  
directly to the TV or projector. This  
setting is used to listen to audio on a  
multi channel TV, etc.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move the  
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LEVEL (VOLUME LEVEL):  
5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP  
5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP  
Adjust the multiroom output level with the 1 or 2  
cursor buttons. The volume can be set between  
-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.  
The SR6001 has source selectors, sleep timers and  
multispeaker output remote control units for the other  
rooms in the multi room system.  
This unit has DC trigger control jack, which is linked  
with input functions of main room or multiroom, and  
controls DC trigger output.  
Note:  
These features can be set from this menu.  
Each trigger can be setup separately.  
• This setting can be changed when the SURR B is  
set to “NONE” in the SPEAKER SIZE menu and  
SPEAKER C” is in the OFF position on the rear  
panel. When this setting is unavailable, “***” is  
displayed.  
Select “5. PREFERENCE” from the MAIN  
MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button.  
Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
ENTER button.  
1.  
1.  
• If “VOLUME” is set to “FIXED”, the multiroom  
output level cannot be adjusted from the A or B  
room.  
Select “MULTI ROOM SETUP” with the 3 or 4  
cursor buttons.  
Select “DC TRIGGER SETUP” with the 3 and  
4 cursor buttons.  
2.  
2.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
3.  
3.  
The following explanation shows how to operate  
MULTI ROOM of the multi-room system.  
DC TRIGGER SETUP  
DC TRIG:DISABLE  
MULTI ROOM SETUP  
TV  
:
:
:
:
TAPE  
CD/R  
AUX2  
TUNER :  
7.1CH :  
:
:
:
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
AUDIO  
SLEEP  
:DVD  
:OFF  
MONO/ST:STEREO  
AUX1 :  
MULT:OFF  
VOL :VARI  
MSPK:  
VOL :  
LEV :-90dB LEV :  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
RETURN  
BACK  
EXIT  
You can selectMAIN ROOM,MULTI ROOM”,  
REMOTEor DISABLEwith the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
4.  
Select the desired item with the 3 or 4 cursor  
button.  
4.  
Note:  
• REMOTE is available for the external control. The  
RC5001SR cannot operate the function.  
AUDIO:  
Select the audio source of the multiroom output  
with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
Select desired input source with the 3 or  
cursor buttons.  
4
5.  
6.  
7.  
SLEEP:  
The sleep mode is available when the multiroom is  
active, set the time with 1 or 2 cursor buttons.The  
sleep timer can be set to a maximum 90 minutes  
in 10 minute increments.  
Set to “ON” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
MONO/ST:  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 or  
cursor button and press the ENTER button.  
This mode switches audio output to the multi room  
system between MONAURAL and STEREO,  
using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons.  
4
MULTI (MULTI ROOM):  
Switch the multiroom output “ON” or “OFF” with the  
1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
Note:  
• When an input source that is on in the set room is  
selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER  
output terminal.  
MSPK (MULTI SPEAKER):  
Switch the speaker output “ON” or “OFF” with the  
1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
VOL (VOLUME SETUP):  
Select whether the multiroom or multi speaker  
output level is variable or fixed with the 1 or 2  
cursor buttons.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “FRONT”, “FLAT”, “AUDYSSEY”,  
PRESET” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
6 ACOUSTIC EQ  
3.  
This display is for setting up the equalizer and  
changing the Equalizer mode.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move the  
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
PRESET G. EQ ADJ :  
“6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ” (see page 43)  
CHECK AUTO :  
“6-2 CHECK AUTO” (see page 43)  
Note:  
• “AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT” and “FLAT” can be  
selected after executing the AUTO SETUP feature.  
EQ MODE:  
There are 4 equalizer modes to choose from:  
PRESET G. EQ that allows the user to manually  
adjust the equalizer, and AUDYSSEY, FRONT and  
FLAT that automatically adjust the equalizer from the  
measurement results of the AUTO SETUP feature  
(see page 32).  
• If a speaker that was determined “NON” in Auto  
Setup is manually turned on, the “AUDYSSEY”,  
“FRONT” and “FLAT” modes cannot be selected.  
• The equalizer turns off when the Pure Direct mode,  
Source Direct mode, Dolby Headphone or Virtual  
mode is set.  
AUDYSSEY:  
This mode adjusts the frequency characteristics  
of all speakers so as to create the best listening  
environment for the sound characteristics of the  
listening room.  
FRONT:  
6.ACOUSTIC EQ.  
EQ.MODE : OFF  
This mode matches the characteristics of each  
speaker to those of the front speakers.  
FLAT:  
PRESET G.EQ1 ADJ  
CHECK AUTO  
This mode flattens the frequency characteristics of  
all speakers.It is suited for playback of multichannel  
music such as Dolby Digital and DTS.  
PRESET:  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
This mode adjusts the graphic equalizer that  
characteristics of each speaker (see page 43).  
OFF:  
PRESET ADJUST  
RESET:ALLCH  
CHECK AUTO  
MD:AUDYSSEY  
CH:SR  
The graphic equalizer is not used.  
63-15.0  
125 -2.5  
250 -5.0  
500 +9.0  
1k +3.5  
2k -5.5  
4k -7.0  
8k-18.5  
16k-20.0  
63-15.0  
125 -2.5  
250 -5.0  
500 +9.0  
1k +3.5  
2k -5.5  
4k -7.0  
8k-18.5  
16k-20.0  
CH  
:SR  
+9  
+9  
Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
0dB  
0dB  
1.  
-20  
-20  
ENTER button.  
63 250 1k 4k 16k  
125 500 2k 8k  
63 250 1k 4k 16k  
125 500 2k 8k  
6.ACOUSTIC EQ.  
RETURN  
EXIT  
RETURN  
EXIT  
EQ.MODE  
: OFF  
PRESET G.EQ ADJ  
CHECK AUTO  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
Select “EQ. MODE” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
2.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ  
6-2 CHECK AUTO  
These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic  
equalizer for each of the 7 channels.  
These menus are for confirming the results of  
AUTO SETUP function equalizer measurement  
(AUDYSSEY, FRONT, FLAT).  
Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
ENTER button.  
1.  
Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
1.  
ENTER button.  
Select “PRESET G. EQ ADJ” with the 3 or  
cursor buttons.  
4
2.  
3.  
Select “CHECK AUTO” with the  
buttons.  
3
or  
4
cursor  
2.  
3.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
PRESET ADJUST  
RESET:CH  
63  
125  
250  
500  
1k  
2k  
4k  
8k  
16k  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
CHECK AUTO  
CH  
:FL  
MD:AUDYSSEY  
CH:FL  
63  
125  
250  
500  
1k  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
+9  
0dB  
+9  
0dB  
-20  
2k  
63 250 1k 4k 16k  
125 500 2k 8k  
-20  
4k  
8k  
16k  
63 250 1k 4k 16k  
125 500 2k 8k  
RETURN  
EXIT  
RETURN  
EXIT  
RESET:  
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the  
channel(s) to be reset to either the currently  
displayed channel (“CH”) or all channels (“ALL),  
and press the ENTER button to enter the setting.  
“ALL” : Resets all channels.  
“CH” : Resets only the currently displayed  
channel.  
Select MD (mode) with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons  
followed by the desired equalizer (“AUDYSSEY”,  
“FRONT”, “FLAT”).  
CH:  
Select the channel to check with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
CH:  
Select the channel (“FL”, “C”, “FR”, “SR”, “SBR”,  
SBL” or “SL”) to adjust with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode with  
the 4 cursor button.  
Notes:  
• The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the  
Preset G. EQ modes.  
• FL and FR are not indicated on the CHECK AUTO  
2 menu.  
Frequency:  
Select the target frequency on the graph with the  
1 or 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button  
to enter the selection. Adjust the level with the 3 or  
4 cursor buttons. (Note that this can be adjusted  
to any level between –20 and +9 dB in 0.5 dB  
increments.)  
Once finished checking, select “RETURN” with  
4.  
the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER  
button to return to the “6. ACOUSTIC EQ”  
menu.  
Move to the next frequency with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons, and adjust the level.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, press the  
ENTER button to enter the settings. Move cursor to  
RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE  
Example: AUTO SURROUND  
ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME  
ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE)  
CONTROL  
BASIC OPERATION  
(PLAY BACK)  
7.1CH IN  
A/D  
HT-EQ  
READY  
VOLUME  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
OFF  
SURROUND  
IGITAL  
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
l/  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
VOLUME  
CH/ CAT  
GHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
AAC  
PCM  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
SL  
SR  
INPUT SELECTOR  
DOWN  
UP  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
CH-SEL  
AUTO  
dts  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
DSD  
BAND  
DISPLAY  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
BASS  
TREBLE  
MultEQ  
MIC  
Before you can listen to any input media, you must  
first select the input source on the SR6001.  
EX/ES  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
INFO  
MENU  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MUL  
SPEAK  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
AUTO  
MULTI  
4
5
6
7.1CH INPUT  
TUNER  
TAPE  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
STANDBY  
MENU  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
Example : DVD  
ENTER  
AUX1  
AMP  
TUNER  
TAPE  
CD  
CDR  
MD  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
INPUT SELECTOR  
Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using  
the VOLUME control knob on the front panel or  
VOLUME + / – buttons on the remote.  
To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob  
clockwise or press VOLUME + button on the remote,  
to decrease the volume, turn counterclockwise or  
press VOLUME – button on the remote.  
CH-SEL  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
BASS  
TREBLE  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
DSD  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
During a listening session you may wish to adjust the  
Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes  
or room acoustics.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MUL  
SPEA  
TUNER  
TAPE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
7.1CH INPUT  
AUX1  
AMP  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
STANDBY  
MENU  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
(Using the SR6001)  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
To select the Auto surround mode during playback,  
press the AUTO button on the front panel.  
(Using the remote control unit)  
To adjust the bass effect, press BASS+ or BASS–.  
To adjust the treble effect, TREBLE+ or TREBLE–.  
Notes:  
(Using the remote control unit)  
To select the Auto surround mode, press the AMP  
button first to enter the AMP mode then press the  
AUTO button.  
• For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on  
page 46.  
• The volume can be adjusted within the range of –  
to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.  
To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob  
on the front panel or press the DVD button on the  
remote two times in a row. After you have selected  
DVD, simply turn on the DVD player and play the  
DVD.  
Notes:  
However, when the channel level is set as described on  
page 37, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB  
or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB.  
• The tone control function is unavailable for the  
Source Direct, Pure Direct, Dolby Headphone,  
Dolby Virtual Speaker and 192kHz PCM.  
(In this case the maximum volume adjustment range  
is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level)  
• The tone control function is not available when  
ACOUSTIC EQ is used.  
To select a specific surround mode, Press the  
individual surround mode button on page 9 on the  
remote control unit.  
• As the input source is changed, the new input  
name will appear momentarily an OSD information  
on the video display. The input name will also  
appear in the display, on the front-panel.  
DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE  
NIGHT MODE  
• If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see  
page 30) , the renamed name appears on the  
display.  
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of  
Dolby Digital.  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
EX/ES  
• As the input is changed, the SR6001 will  
automatically switch to the digital input, surround  
mode, attenuation, and night mode status which  
were entered during the configuration process for  
that source.  
When playing back software which has been  
encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a  
brief message on the FL display which will read "D-  
NORM" (X being a numeric value).  
Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the  
source material has been recorded at a higher or  
lower level than usual. For example, if you see the  
following message: "D-NORM + 4 dB" on the FL  
display, to keep the overall output level constant just  
turn down the volume control by 4 dB. In other words,  
the source material that you are listening to has been  
recorded 4 dB louder than usual.  
4
5
6
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
7
8
9
A/D  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
• When an audio source is selected, the last  
video input used remains routed to the VCR &  
DSS Outputs and Monitor Output. This permits  
simultaneous viewing and listening to different  
sources.  
(Using the remote control unit)  
Press the NIGHT button to turn on the Night mode.  
Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses the  
dynamic range in Dolby Digital only.  
This softens loud passages such as sudden  
explosions, to help prevent disturbing others late at  
night. To turn off the Night mode, Press the NIGHT  
button again.  
• When a video source is selected, the selected  
video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT  
terminal.  
If you do not see a message on the FL display, then  
no adjustment of the volume control is necessary.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR6001  
CONNECTION EXAMPLE  
VIDEO CONVERT  
TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND  
• When a monitor is connected to the HDMI  
MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR6001  
A
V
SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
7.1CH IN  
A/D  
HT-EQ  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION  
P
U
R
E
D
I
R
E
C
T
CL  
MEMO  
DSD  
0
+10  
DOWN  
UP  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
A
UT  
O
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7
.
1
C
H
I
N
P
U
T
DISPLAY  
A
V
SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
P
U
R
E
D
I
R
E
C
T
H
T
-
E
Q
MultEQ  
MIC  
S
T
A
N
D
B
Y
READY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
A
UX  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
The SR6001 is equipped to convert video signals  
for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of  
the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT  
VIDEO) between the playback device and the  
SR6001, listening and viewing are possible with a  
single higher grade cable between the MONITOR  
OUT terminal of the SR6001 and the monitor.  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
PURE DIRECT  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T
-MODE  
MEMOR  
Y
CLEAR  
7
.
1
C
H
I
N
P
U
T
DISPLA  
Y
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
P
U
R
E
D
I
R
E
C
T
H
T
-
E
Q
MultEQ  
MIC  
STANDBY  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
A
UX  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
or component  
component  
INFO  
MENU  
VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
or component  
or HDMI  
ENTER  
HDMI  
HDMI  
To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as  
when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE  
button on the remote.  
This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the  
head-phone jack, but it will not affect any recording or  
dubbing that may be in progress.  
When the system is muted, the display will show  
MUTE” .  
Press the MUTE button again to return to normal  
operation.  
UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO  
SIGNALS TO HDMI  
Notes:  
Notes:  
• The HDMI video signal input from the playback  
device is not output from the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR6001.  
• If the resolution of the component video signal  
input from the playback device is other than 480i,  
480p, 1080i or 720p, images are not output from the  
HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR6001.  
The up-conversion feature of the SR6001 can output  
the input analog video signals (for component video  
signals of 480i, 480p, 1080i and 720p resolution, and  
S-Video and Video (composite) of 480i resolution) to  
the HDMI MONITOR terminal.  
Notes of OSD menu system:  
• If the resolution of the S-Video or Video signal input  
from the playback device is other than 480i, images  
are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT  
terminal of the SR6001.  
• The setup menu can be displayed through all  
video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT”,  
“SVIDEO” and “VIDEO”).  
Notes:  
• HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI  
MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR6001. If  
connecting a playback device such as a DVD  
player to the HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI  
MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR6001 to a TV  
monitor.  
• OSD information is output only to the VIDEO and  
S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals.  
• When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO or S-  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR6001  
USING THE SLEEP TIMER  
OSD information is also output when the video  
conversion feature is on and the video signal input  
to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO input jack of the SR6001  
is converted and output from the COMPONENT  
VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals.  
A
V
SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
READ  
Y
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI  
UT  
A
UTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SURROUND  
DIT
SLEEP  
A
O
SURR  
MT  
X
6.  
1
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
A
AC  
P
C
M
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
A
UTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMOR  
Y
CLEAR  
• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.  
7
.
1
C
H
I
N
P
U
T
DISPLA  
Y
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
P
U
R
E
D
I
R
E
C
T
H
T
-
E
Q
MultEQ  
MIC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
A
UX  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
LEARN  
SEND  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
• This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast  
forward and reverse play on video component.  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
l/  
If, while attempting to use the video convert feature,  
the SR6001 cannot synchronize with the display  
device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the monitor or  
noise is generated, this feature cannot be used. All of  
these signs are caused by equipment incompatibility;  
there is nothing wrong with the SR6001.  
If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the  
VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next,  
connectthevideoinputsignaltothedisplaycomponent  
via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and  
the S-video input signal to the display component via  
the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO.  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
I/P CONVERT  
or S-VIDEO  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
or component  
The video circuit of the SR6001 is equipped with an  
I/P conversion feature.  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
EX/ES  
HDMI  
4
5
6
When this feature is on, 480i analog video signals  
(VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO) input  
from a playback device can be converted to 480p and  
progressively output to the COMPONENT VIDEO or  
HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR6001.  
(For setting instructions, see page 39)  
To program the SR6001 for automatic standby, press  
the SLEEP button on the remote.  
Each press of the button will increase the time before  
Notes:  
• The HDMI video signal input from the playback  
device is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR6001.  
shut down in the following sequence.  
• If the resolution of the component video signal input  
from the playback device is other than 480i, it is not  
output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT terminals of the SR6001.  
• The video convert feature constantly monitors  
input video signals and determines whether to  
convert the input signals or not. However, some  
input video signals cannot be detected correctly.  
If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the  
VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.  
OFF  
90  
10  
80  
20  
70  
30  
60  
40  
50  
The sleep time will be shown for a few seconds in the  
display on the front panel, and it will count down until  
the time has elapsed.  
When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the  
unit will automatically turn off.  
Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will  
illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed.  
To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP  
button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the  
SLEEP indicator will disappear.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTO  
2 MODE  
EX/ES  
SURROUND MODE  
SURROUND  
When this mode is selected, the SR6001 determines  
whether the digital input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby  
Digital Surround EX, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24 or  
PCM audio.  
Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel  
sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or  
DTS-ES auto trigger flag in the digital signal.  
When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the  
number of channels for which the corresponding  
signal is encoded will be played.  
Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with  
Dolby surround status automatically subjects that  
signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before play.  
PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this  
mode.  
This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby  
Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material  
such as DVD.  
This mode cannot be used when an analog input has  
been selected.  
(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic IIx MOVIE, Pro Logic II  
MUSIC, Pro Logic IIx GAME)  
This mode is used with source materials encoded in  
Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.  
x
The SR6001 is equipped with many surround  
modes. These are provided to reproduce a variety of  
surround sound effects, according to the content of  
the source to be played.  
The available surround modes may be restricted  
depending on the input signal and speaker setup.  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
This mode is enabled when playing source materials  
encoded in Dolby Digital.  
Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby  
Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left,  
center, right, surround left and surround right) and a  
Low Frequency Effect channel.  
Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this  
mode.  
Dolby Digital EX  
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been  
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology  
are able to reproduce an extra channel which has  
been added during the mixing of the program.  
This channel, called surround back, places sounds  
behind the listener in addition to the currently  
available front left, front center, front right, surround  
right, surround left and subwoofer channels.  
This additional channel provides the opportunity  
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and  
brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before.  
SOURCE DIRECT  
In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit  
Acoustic EQ. and bass management configuration  
are bypassed for full-range frequency response and  
the purist audio reproduction.  
Notes:  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes:  
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround  
sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie  
soundtracks.  
• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD  
players, performing operations such as skip or stop  
may momentarily interrupt the output.  
Notes:  
• Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center =  
LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer  
= YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and  
additional processing are deactivated.  
Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do  
not have without surround back speaker(s).  
• When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed  
to AUTO mode automatically. See page 48 to  
confirm the available decoding modes.  
Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround  
sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or  
digital), such as CD, tape, FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc.  
Pro Logic IIx GAME  
This mode restores the impact low-frequency  
surround effects by routing them to the system’s  
subwoofer.  
DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1)  
• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD  
players, performing operations such as skip or stop  
may momentarily interrupt the output.  
DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to  
the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic  
positioning, and makes acoustic image movement  
more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction.  
The SR6001 incorporates a DTS-ES-decoder, which  
can handle DTS-ES Discrete-encoded and DTS-ES  
Matrix-encoded program sources from DVD, etc.  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete  
recording of all channels, including the surround back  
channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction.  
DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have  
surround back speakers.  
PURE DIRECT  
5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Movie  
This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from  
The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of  
noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode,  
by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO,  
S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and  
turning the FL display off.  
5.1 channel sources movie soundtracks  
.
5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Music  
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound  
from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.  
Notes:  
• Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II  
mode when the SURR. B is set to “NONE” from  
SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 35)  
dts  
dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music  
• Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input  
signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or  
PCM format.  
This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials  
such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2  
channel sources.  
dts  
This mode is enabled when playing source materials  
encoded in dts multichannel.  
Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts  
sources provides five main audio channels (left,  
center, right, surround left and surround right) and a  
Low Frequency Effects channel.  
dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode.  
The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog  
input has been selected.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music  
Notes for HDCD  
STEREO  
HDCD is effective only through digital input.  
This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel  
signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology.  
The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties  
in the frequency characteristics of the channels as well  
as in channel separation.  
According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6  
uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for  
movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized  
for music playback.  
This mode bypasses all surround processing.  
In stereo program sources, the left and right channels  
play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is  
input.  
With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels  
are converted to two channel stereo. 96 kHz PCM  
source material can be played back in stereo mode.  
You may not be able to play some HDCD source  
signals from certain CD players if you connect  
the player to the SR6001 digitally. This is because  
the digital signal has been processed (such as  
the output level, sampling frequency or frequency  
response) and the SR6001 cannot recognize the  
signal as HDCD data.  
CAUTION  
Note:  
The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input  
signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD  
or PCM format.  
Notes for DTS  
To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD  
player needs to support DTS digital output. You  
may not be able to play some DTS source signals  
from certain CD players and LD players even if you  
connect the player to the SR6001 digitally. This  
is because the digital signal has been processed  
(such as the output level, sampling frequency or  
frequency response), and the SR6001 cannot  
recognize the signal as DTS data.  
MULTI CH. (MOVIE, MUSIC)  
This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more  
natural soundstage from two channel source material.  
This is done by feeding the left channel signal to  
both the left front and left surround speakers and the  
right channel signal to both the right front and right  
surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel  
reproduces a mix of the right and left channels.  
• Depending on the player used, DTS play may  
produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.  
• While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are  
playing in another surround mode, you cannot  
switch to digital input or from digital input to analog  
input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU  
or by pressing the A/D button.  
CIRCLE SURROUND II  
(CSII-CINEMA, CSII-MUSIC, CSII-MONO)  
Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel  
surround sound playback of non-encoded and  
multichannel encoded material.  
Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to  
6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire  
collection of music and film, including broadcast,  
videotape and stereo recorded music.  
Depending on source material, you can select CSII-  
Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-Mono  
mode.  
You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a  
multiroom.  
The outputs for VCR OUT, TAPE OUT and CD-R  
OUT output analog audio signals only. Do not record  
from CDs or LDs that support DTS using these  
outputs. If you do, the DTS-encoded signal will be  
recorded as noise.  
Notes or Dolby Digital Surround EX  
When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded  
software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the  
EX/ES mode.  
Note:  
• The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input  
signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD  
or PCM format.  
• NotethatsomeDolbyDigitalSurroundEX-encoded  
software does not contain the identification signal.  
In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually.  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Notes for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio  
The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be  
used when playing PCM signals with a sampling  
frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVD-Video/  
Audio discs).  
Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary  
technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual  
surround sound field using only two speakers for the  
front channels, allowing the user to experience sound  
as if surround speakers were actually being used.  
Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For  
details, refer to the player’s operation manual.  
Some DVD discs feature copy protection.When using  
such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the  
DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation  
manual.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Channel  
SL SBL  
SR SBR  
Front information display  
Channel status  
The relationship between the selected surround  
mode and the input signal  
Surround Mode  
AUTO  
Input Signal  
Decoding  
L/R  
C
SubW Signal format indicators  
The surround mode is selected with the surround  
mode selector on the SR6001 or the remote control  
unit. However, the sound you hear is subject to the  
relationship between the selected surround mode  
and the input signal. That relationship is as follows:  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Dolby Digital 2.0  
Pro Logic IIx movie  
DTS-ES  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
2 DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
PCM  
PCM  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
PCM  
PCM  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTS 96/24  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
DSD (5.1ch)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
PCM 96kHz  
HDCD  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
Multi Ch-PCM  
PCM (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo 96kHz)  
HDCD  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Analog  
7.1ch input  
Stereo  
Multi Ch  
-
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
SOURCE DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Dolby Digital 2.0  
Pro Logic IIx movie  
DTS-ES  
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTS 96/24  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
DSD (5.1ch)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
PCM 96kHz  
HDCD  
Analog  
7.1ch input  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
DTS-ES  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
DSD (5.1ch)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo 96kHz)  
HDCD  
Stereo  
Multi Ch  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
DTS-ES  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
ANALOG  
2 DIGITAL EX  
EX/ES  
2 DIGITAL  
dts, ES  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi-PCM  
DTS-ES  
dts  
PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby Digital EX  
Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLIIx  
Pro Logic IIx  
Pro Logic IIx  
Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx  
Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx  
Pro Logic IIx  
Pro Logic IIx  
Pro Logic IIx  
Pro Logic IIx  
DTS 5.1  
DSD (5.1ch)  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
DSD (5.1ch)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
Analog  
DTS-ES  
DTS 96/24  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM(Audio)  
HDCD  
Analog  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM(Audio)  
HDCD  
Analog  
DSD  
2 DIGITAL EX  
DOLBY  
-
2 DIGITAL  
(PLIIx movie)  
(PLIIx music)  
(PLIIx game)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND  
PCM  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2 DIGITAL  
DTS  
(Neo:6 Cinema)  
(Neo:6 Music)  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
CSII  
CSII Cinema  
CSII Music  
CSII Mono  
CSII  
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
CSII  
CSII  
CSII  
CSII  
Stereo  
ANALOG  
2 DIGITAL EX  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
STEREO  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
-
-
-
-
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND  
-
-
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
PCM  
PCM  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM  
DTS 96/24  
-
-
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
DSD (5.1ch)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
PCM 96kHz  
HDCD  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
Analog  
-
-
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Channel  
SL SBL  
Front information display  
Channel status  
Notes:  
Surround Mode  
Input Signal  
Decoding  
L/R  
C
SubW Signal format indicators  
• Dolby Digital (2 channel L/R): Speakers for signal  
with Dolby Surround are fully equipped.  
SR SBR  
-
Dolby Virtual  
Speaker  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Multi Channel  
Multi Channel  
DTS-ES  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Channel  
Multi Channel  
Multi Channel  
Multi Channel  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2 DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
-
-
2 DIGITAL  
• No sound is outputs from the surround speaker,  
center speaker and subwoofer if the DVD disc has  
no surround data.  
-
-
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND  
dts, ES  
-
-
L, R, S  
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
DTS 96/24  
-
-
-
-
dts 96/24  
dts  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
DSD (5.1ch)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
Analog  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM  
DSD  
-
-
-
-
-
-
DSD  
PCM  
Abbreviations  
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
L/R : Front speakers  
C : Center speaker  
-
-
-
Multi Ch.  
Movie  
Music  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
2 DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
2 DIGITAL  
SL/SR : Surround speakers  
SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers  
SubW : Subwoofer  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
PCM  
PCM  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND  
dts, ES  
L, R, S  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
DTS 96/24  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
DSD (5.1ch)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
Analog  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Dolby H.P  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
L, R, S  
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
DTS 96/24  
-
-
-
-
dts 96/24  
dts  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
DSD (5.1ch)  
DSD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
Analog  
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM  
DSD  
-
-
-
-
-
-
DSD  
PCM  
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
-
-
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL  
DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE  
VIDEO ON/OFF  
OTHER FUNCTION  
TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION  
.
.
This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual  
sounds heard from the speakers.  
When headphones are used, the MENU button  
automatically switches to the Dolby headphone  
mode.  
When no video signal is connected to the SR6001  
or a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV,  
the unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by  
selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting.  
To select video off, press the AMP button and press  
the V-OFF button.  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
This function allows the component connected to the  
TV-VIDEO in jack to control the power (ON/OFF) to  
the SR6001.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
CH-SEL  
The OSD that appears when the MENU button is  
pressed is shown below.  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
DSS  
MD  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
TUNER  
CDR  
TUNER  
TAPE  
CD  
MD  
HEAD PHONE  
UND RECEIVER SR6001  
AUTO POWER ON  
AUX1  
AMP  
DOLBY HP MODE :DH  
If the selected analog audio input signal is greater  
than the capable level of internal processing, the  
PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If  
this happens, you should press the ATT button on  
the remote.  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SURROUND  
:PLII MV  
Be sure the TV auto mode is ENABLED. (Refer  
to page 39: PREFERENCE)  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
1.  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
L LEVEL  
R LEVEL  
:+10.0dB  
:
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
Connect your TV TUNER (etc) to the TV-  
VIDEO in terminal. Be sure to connect the  
VIDEO input.  
0.0dB  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
2.  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
ONES  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
ATT” indicator will be illuminated when this function  
is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by  
about half. Attenuation will not work with the output  
signal of TAPE-OUT, CD/CD-R and VCR OUT.  
This function is memorized for each individual input  
source.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
Turn OFF the power to the TV TUNER and the  
SR6001.  
3.  
CH-SEL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected  
with the left and right cursor buttons.  
BYPASS DH (DOLBY Headphone) BYPASS  
Turn ON theTVTUNER and tune in a receivable  
station.  
4.  
When the station is received, the SR6001 turns  
ON and TV is selected automatically.  
5.  
BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode  
and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo.  
LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES  
DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing  
system that delivers a sound similar to  
room speakers.  
AUTO POWER OFF  
This jack may be used to listen to the SR6001’s  
output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that  
the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono  
plug. (Note that the speakers will automatically be  
turned off when the headphone jack is in use.)  
In the above situation, turn the TV TUNER OFF  
or select a channel that does not contain any  
broadcast.  
1.  
It makes it possible to experience the  
volume and space of a 5-channel  
surround system using ordinary stereo  
headphones.  
ThepowertotheSR6001switchestoSTANDBY  
after approx. 5 minutes.  
2.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
INPUT SELECTOR  
When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby  
surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is  
displayed as the mode indication.  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SP  
DISC 6.1  
Notes:  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
DSD  
• AUTO POWER OFF is canceled if the SR6001 is  
set to a source other than TV.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
The surround mode can be selected when the  
modes in DH is selected.  
7.1CH INPUT  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
STANDBY  
MENU  
The function reactivates when TV is selected again.  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
L/R LEVEL can be set in the 12 dB range.  
• Some TV broadcasts may cause the TV AUTO  
FUNCTION to turn ON.  
Notes:  
• The S-Video terminal does not support “TV AUTO  
ON/OFF” function.  
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as  
soon as the plug is removed from the jack.  
Note:  
• TONE and ACOUSTIC EQ cannot be set when the  
DH mode is selected.  
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as  
soon as the plug is removed from the jack.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DISPLAY MODE  
SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR  
DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT  
RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE  
SPEAKER A/B  
In normal operation, the audio or video source  
selected for listening through the SR6001 is sent to  
the record outputs.  
This means that any program you are watching  
or listening to may be recorded simply by placing  
machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT,  
CD/CDR OUT and VCR OUT in the record mode.  
-
STEREO  
.
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
7
8
9
A/D  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
VOLUME  
LEARN  
SEND  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
SURROUND  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
TUNER  
TAPE  
CD  
MD  
ULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
CL  
MEMO  
DIGITAL  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
0
+10  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
AAC  
PCM  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
VOLUME  
l/  
CH/ CAT  
AUX1  
AMP  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
S
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
MultEQ  
MIC  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
ENTER  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
PHONES  
EX/ES  
INFO  
MENU  
4
5
6
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
7
8
9
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
To record the input source signal you are currently  
watching or listening to  
7
8
9
A/D  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
SR6001 has speaker system - A and speaker  
system- B for front L/R channels.  
You can select these systems by pressing  
SPEAKERS A/B button on the front panel or SPKR  
A/B on the remote.  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
You can select the display mode for the front display  
of the SR6001.  
To select this mode, press the DISPLAY on the  
remote control or the front panel.  
When this button is pressed, the display mode is  
switched in the following sequence.  
Input Mode Surround Mode Auto display OFF  
Display OFF Normal Mode Input Mode  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
1.  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
INPUT SELECTOR  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
CH-SEL  
If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you  
can temporarily select the audio input mode for each  
input source as following procedures.  
Press the AMP button first to enter the AMP mode  
then press the A/D button.  
DSD  
BASS  
TREBLE  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
AUTO  
MULTI  
7.1CH INPUT  
TUNER  
TAPE  
1.  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
STANDBY  
MENU  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
AUX1  
AMP  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
When this button is pressed, the input mode is  
switched in the following sequence.  
Auto HDMI Digital Analog Auto  
Normal Mode:  
Displays the selected input function. If the function  
has been renamed using the Function Rename  
feature (see page 30), the renamed name appears  
on the display.  
Select the input source to record by turning the  
INPUT FUNCTION SELECTOR knob on the  
front panel or simply press the input selector  
buttons on the remote.  
1.  
Auto mode:  
The types of signals being input to the digital and  
analog input jacks for the selected input source are  
detected automatically.  
Input Mode:  
Displays the input mode set via the Function Input  
Setup feature (see page 29).  
If no digital signal is being input, the analog input  
jacks are selected automatically.  
HDMI mode:  
HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI  
input has been assigned as an input source.  
When “HDMI AUDIO” under PREFERENCE of the  
SETUP MENU is set to “THROUGH”, the HDMI  
mode cannot be selected.  
The input source is now selected and you may  
watch or listen to it as desired.  
Surround Mode:  
Displays the status of the selected surround  
mode.  
The currently selected input source signal is  
output to the TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT and  
VCR OUT outputs for recording.  
2.  
3.  
Auto Display Off mode:  
The display is off. But, if you make a change to  
the unit such as the input or surround mode, the  
display will show that change, then go back to off  
after about 3 seconds.When changing the volume,  
it is not displayed.  
Start recording to the recording component as  
desired.  
Digital mode:  
The input signal is fixed to an assigned digital input  
terminal.  
Analog mode:  
The analog input jacks are selected.  
Display Off mode:  
The display is off completely.  
Note:  
This selection is temporary and will not be stored in  
memory.  
To store changes to the input mode, select “1. INPUT  
SETUP” from the MAIN MENU. (See page 29)  
• Only the DISP indicator will be illuminated on the  
front display in display off condition.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select a desired Video source to decide the  
routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs.  
7.1 CH INPUT  
AUX2 INPUT  
LIP.SYNC  
1.  
2.  
The SR6001 is equipped for future expansion  
through the use of Multi channel Super Audio CD  
multichannel player or DVD-Audio player.  
If you don’t need to connect 7.1 Ch. input terminals  
with multi channel decoder,  
L(front left) and R (front right) inputs terminals are  
available as AUX2 input.  
In this case,You can connect additional audio source  
to AUX2 as other audio input terminals.  
Depending on the image device (TV, monitor,  
projector, etc.) connected to the SR6001, a time lag  
can occur between image signal processing and  
audio signal processing. Though minor, this time  
lag can interfere with movie and music enjoyment.  
The LIP.SYNC feature delays the audio signal with  
respect to the image signal output from the SR6001  
to correct the time lag between the sound and image.  
It can be operated with the “LIP SYNC” and 1 and  
2 cursor buttons of the remote controller. Set the  
remote controller to the AMP mode before operating  
the LIP.SYNC feature. The initial setting is OFF (0  
ms).The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up  
to 200 ms.  
Press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front  
panel or press 7.1 CH on the remote to switch  
the 7.1 channel input.  
When this is selected, the input signals connected to  
theL(frontleft), R(frontright), CENTER, SL(surround  
left), SR (surround right) and SBL (surround back left)  
and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1  
CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and  
right), center, surround (left and right) and surround  
back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks  
without passing through the surround circuitry.  
In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer)  
jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack.  
When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input  
used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs.  
This permits simultaneous viewing with video  
sources  
If it is necessary to adjust the output level of  
each channel, press the CH-SEL button on the  
remote.  
3.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
INPUT SELECTOR  
Adjust the speaker output levels so that you can  
hear the same sound level from each speaker  
at the listening position. For the front left, front  
right, center, surround left, surround right and  
surround back speakers, the output levels can  
be adjusted between –12 to +12 dB.  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI AUTO  
AUTO SURR  
SLEEP  
DSD  
SURROUND  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
7.1CH  
I
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
STANDBY  
MEN  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV,  
monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.  
The subwoofer can be adjusted between –18  
and +12 dB.  
Note:  
These adjustments result will be stored to 7.1  
CH. INPUT memory.  
• The LIP.SYSNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in  
the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the  
SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the  
set value of the LIP.SYSNC feature is automatically  
restored.  
1.  
2.  
AdjustthemainvolumewiththeMAINVOLUME  
knob or the VOL buttons on the remote.  
4.  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
7
8
9
A/D  
INPUT SELECTOR  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
CL  
MEMO  
To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT setting, press the 7.1  
CH INPUT button on the front panel or press 7.1 CH  
on the remote.  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
0
+10  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
2.  
4.  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
DSD  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
7.1CH INPUT  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
EX/ES  
STANDBY  
Notes:  
E
INFO  
MENU  
MENU  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
4
5
6
• When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select  
a surround mode, as the external decoder determines  
processing.  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
ENTER  
7
8
9
A/D  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
• In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs  
when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
4.  
-
PRESET  
+
-
TUNING  
+
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
READY  
VOLUME  
CH-SEL  
3.  
1.  
INFO  
MENU  
BASS  
TREBLE  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
M
SL  
SR  
DOWN  
UP  
TUNER  
TAPE  
ENTER  
DE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
AUX1  
AMP  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
MultEQ  
MIC  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(Using the SR6001)  
(Using the SR6001)  
(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)  
BASIC OPERATION  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
TUNER”.  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
TUNER”.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
(TUNER)  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
EX/ES  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
4
5
6
To operate the unit from the remote control, press  
the TUNER button on the remote control so that the  
tuner mode is engaged.  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
R
7
8
9
A/D  
VOLUME  
Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front  
Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto  
tuning function.  
Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front  
Panel to select the desired station.  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
CL  
MEMO  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
0
+10  
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DOWN  
UP  
.
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
LISTENING TO THE TUNER  
(Using the remote control unit)  
DISPLAY  
Automatic searching begins then stops when a  
station is tuned in.  
BASS  
TREBLE  
4.  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
MultEQ  
MIC  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
R
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
Frequency scan step for AM is selectable.  
To select tuner, press the TUNER button twice  
within two seconds on the remote.  
TUNER  
TAPE  
1.  
Default setup is 10 kHz step, if your country’s  
standard is 9 kHz step, Press BAND button on the  
front panel or TUNER button on the remote more  
than 5 seconds. Scan step will change.  
AUX1  
AMP  
(Using the remote control unit)  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
2.  
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice  
within two second on the remote.  
1.  
Press the TUNING + or button to tune in the  
deseired station.  
3.  
When in the auto stereo mode, AUTO indicator will  
be illuminated on the display.  
The “ST” indicator is illuminated when a stereo  
broadcast is tuned in.  
At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the  
TUNED” and “ST” indicators are not illuminated.  
If the signal is weak, it may be difficult to tune into the  
station in stereo. In such a case, Press the MODE  
button on the front panel. Press the MODE button or  
TUNER button, and press the T.MODE button.  
AUTO” indicator is not illuminated, if FM stereo  
broadcasts are received in monaural and the “ST”  
indicator is not illuminated.  
Note:  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
2.  
Preset memory for the tuner will clear by changing  
this setup.  
Press and hold the TUNING + or button for 1  
second or more.  
DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL  
3.  
AUTO TUNING  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
Automatic searching begins then stops when a  
station is tuned in.  
4.  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
2.  
4.  
EX/ES  
1.  
4
5
6
LEARN  
SEND  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to  
the “Manualtunin” operation.  
7
8
9
A/D  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
INPUT SELECTOR  
l/  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
PURE DIRECT  
DIS  
SLE  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
DSD  
AUTO  
dts  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
SURROUND  
MODE  
AUTO  
2.  
MANUAL TUNING  
EX/ES  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
4
5
6
To return to auto stereo mode, Press the MODE  
button or Press T.MODE button on the remote again.  
AUTO indicator is illuminated the display.  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
STANDBY  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
7
8
9
A/D  
3.  
1.  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
1.  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
CL  
MEMO  
LEARN  
SEND  
0
+10  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
INPUT SELECTOR  
l/  
CH-SEL  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
SLEE  
BASS  
TREBLE  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
DSD  
AUTO  
dts  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
3. 2.  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
SURROUND  
MODE  
2.  
AUTO  
PRESET  
TUNING  
+
EX/ES  
-
+
-
TUNER  
TAPE  
4
5
6
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
3.  
1.  
STANDBY  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
AUX1  
AMP  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
7
8
9
A/D  
CH-SEL  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
CL  
MEMO  
SL  
SR  
BASS  
TREBLE  
0
+10  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
DSD  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T
-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
TUNER  
TAPE  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
AUX1  
AMP  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
3. 2.  
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice  
within two seconds on the remote.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
PRESET  
TUNING  
+
-
+
-
3.  
1.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
CH-SEL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
Press the F.DIRECT on the remote, display will  
show “FREQ----”.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
TUNER  
TAPE  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
AUX1  
AMP  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
lnput your desired station’s, frequency with the  
ten numbered keypad on the remote.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
The desired station will automatically be tuned.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MANUAL PRESET MEMORY  
RECALLING A PRESET STATION  
PRESET CHANNEL LIST DISPLAY  
PRESET MEMORY  
l/  
A complete list of the broadcast channels stored in  
this unit can be displayed.  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations  
in any order.  
For each station, you can memorize the frequency  
and reception mode if desired.  
3.  
2. 4.  
2.  
1.  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
CH-SEL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
AUTO  
dts  
EX/ES  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
BASS  
TREBLE  
BAND  
4
5
6
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
2.  
TUNER  
TAPE  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
2.  
4.  
INFO  
MENU  
EX/ES  
URROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
1.  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
7
8
9
A/D  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
TUNER  
TAPE  
AUX1  
AMP  
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
4
5
6
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
3.  
2.  
AUX1  
AMP  
CL  
MEMO  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
ENTER  
0
+10  
AUTO PRESET MEMORY  
OUND  
DE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T
-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
7
8
9
A/D  
EXIT  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
IRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
This function automatically scans the FM and AM  
band and enters all stations with proper signal  
strength into the memory.  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
Press the TUNER button on the remote control  
twice within two seconds to switch to the  
TUNER function.  
1.  
(Using the SR6001)  
2. 4. 1. 3. 2. 5.  
Select the desired preset station by pressing  
the 1 or 2 cursor buttons on the front panel.  
1.  
(Using the SR6001)  
Press INFO on the remote control.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
2.  
3.  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to  
the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”  
section).  
The list of preset channels will be displayed on  
the screen of the TV monitor connected to this  
unit.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
(Using the remote control unit)  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
P
ress the TUNER button twice within two  
seconds on the remote.  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
1.  
2.  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PRESET LIST  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.  
– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the  
display.  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
NO. 1 FM 87.10 MHz  
NO. 2 FM 93.10 MHz  
NO. 3 FM 94.70 MHz  
NO.10 FM105.70 MHz  
Press the PRESET + or button to tune in the  
deseired preset station.  
Select the preset number by pressing the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons, while this is still blinking  
(approx. 5 seconds)  
Or enter the preset station number with the  
numeric buttons.  
To select FM , press the BAND button on the  
front panel.  
1.  
2.  
Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The  
display stops blinking.  
PRESET SCAN  
While pressing the MEMORY button, press the  
1 cursor button.  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
Up to 10 channels can be displayed at a time.  
CS  
EX/ES  
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
4.  
The station is now stored in the specified preset  
memory location.  
4
5
6
AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display,  
and scanning starts from the lowest frequency.  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
If there are more than 10 channels, press INFO  
on the remote control once more to display the  
next page.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
2.  
5.  
4.  
1.  
7
8
9
A/D  
CH-SEL  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
BASS  
TREBLE  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
(Using the remote control unit)  
5.  
Each time the tuner finds a station, scanning  
will pause and the station will be played for five  
seconds.  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
3.  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
TUNER  
TAPE  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to  
the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”  
section).  
AUX1  
AMP  
1.  
The list display will disappear automatically in 5  
seconds.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
During this time, the following operations are  
possible.  
Press the MEMO button on the remote. “– –“  
(preset number) starts blinking on the display.  
2.  
The band can be changed by the BAND button.  
(Using the remote control unit)  
If no button is pressed during this period, the  
current station is memorized in location Preset  
02.  
Enter the desired preset number by pressing  
the numeric buttons.  
4.  
5.  
3.  
P
ress the TUNER button twice within two  
1.  
2.  
seconds on the remote.  
Note:  
Press the P.SCAN on the remote.  
If you wish to skip the current station, press the  
3 cursor button during this period, this station  
is skipped and auto presetting continues.  
• When entering a single digit number (2 for example),  
either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few  
seconds.  
PRESET SCAN” appears on the front display  
and then the preset station with the lowest  
preset number is recalled first.  
Operation stops automatically when all 50  
preset memory positions are filled or when  
auto scanning attains the highest end of all  
bands. If you desire to stop the auto preset  
memory at anytime, press the CLEAR button.  
Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1  
No.2 etc.) for 5 seconds each.  
3.  
No stored preset number will be skipped.  
You can fast forward the preset stations, press  
the PRESET + continuously.  
4.  
5.  
When the desired preset station is received,  
cancel the preset scan operation by pressing  
the CL button or P.SCAN on the remote.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS  
SORTING PRESET STATIONS  
NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION.  
After selecting the first character to be entered,  
press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press  
the MEMO button on the remote.  
5.  
You can remove preset stations from the memory  
using the following procedure.  
This function allows the name of each preset channel  
to be entered using alphanumeric characters.  
Before name inputting, you need to store preset  
stations with the preset memory operation.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
The entry in this column is fixed and the next  
column starts to flash. Fill the next column the  
same way.  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
2. 3.  
AUTO  
dts  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
EX/ES  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
4.  
5. 2. 5. 6.  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
4
5
6
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
VOLUM  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
To move back and forth between the characters,  
press the 1 / 2 cursor buttons or press PRESET  
+ or button on the remote.  
2.  
3.  
SURROUND  
DGITAL  
D
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
7
8
9
A/D  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
READY  
AAC  
PCM  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
SL  
SR  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
DOWN  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
PURE DIRECT  
URROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.  
1
NIGHT  
EQ  
LTI  
AKER  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
MultEQ  
MIC  
Note:  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
ENTER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
IN  
DIGITAL  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
• Unused columns should be filled by entering  
blanks.  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
INFO  
MENU  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in  
the sequential order:  
I.e. the stations are stored as follows  
1) 87.1 MHz  
To save the name, press the MEMORY or  
ENTER button on the front panel, or press the  
MEMO button on the remote for more than 2  
seconds.  
6.  
Recall the preset number to be cleared with  
the method described in “Recalling” a preset  
station.  
1.  
2) 93.1 MHz  
3) 94.7 MHz  
10) 105.9 MHz  
7
8
9
A/D  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
2. 5. 6.  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
Instead of using the 3 and 4 cursor buttons  
or the TUNING + or buttons of the remote  
controller unit to select characters, characters  
can be input from the numeric keys of the  
remote control unit. See the below table for  
a correspondence between characters and  
numeric keys.  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel  
or press the MEMO button on the remote.  
(notice there is no stations programmed for pre sets  
for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become pre set 5:  
To sort the numbers, press and hold the MEMORY  
and the 4 cursor buttons.  
PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and  
sorting will be done.  
2.  
3.  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
INFO  
MENU  
The stored preset number blinks in the display  
for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the CLEAR  
button on the front panel or press the CL button  
on the remote.  
ENTER  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
xx CLEAR” appears on the display to indicate  
that the specified preset number has been  
cleared.  
4.  
Ten keypad  
Press, press again, press again, etc.  
A B C 1 A  
D E F 2 D  
G H I 3 G  
J K L 4 J  
M N O 5 M  
P Q R 6 P  
S T U 7 S  
V W X 8 V  
Y Z space 9 Y  
+ / 0  
5.  
4. 6.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
CH-SEL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
Note:  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the  
CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.  
Recall the preset number to be inputted name  
with the method described in “Recalling” a  
preset station.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel  
or press the MEMO button on the remote for  
more than 3 seconds.  
The left most column of the station name  
indicator flashes, indicating the character entry  
ready status.  
When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on  
the front panel or the TUNING + or buttons on  
the remote control unit, alphabetic and numeric  
characters will be displayed in the following  
order:  
A B C ... Z 1 2 3 ..... 0 +  
/ (Blank) A  
UP →  
DOWN  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH  
AND RADIO ID  
SWITCHING XM INFORMATION IN THE FRONT  
PANEL DISPLAY  
Adjust the antenna location until signal strength  
is good.  
LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO  
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE  
2.  
3.  
You can display XM information (such as artist name/  
song title, category or signal status) for the channel  
currently selected in the front panel display.  
ENTER  
Select channel 0 (XM000) with the 3 or 4  
cursor buttons of the SR6001 or the Q or  
R buttons of the remote control unit.  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must  
first select the input source on the SR6001.  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
ENTER  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
T.TONE  
1.  
l/  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
3.  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
INFO  
MENU  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
AUTO  
dts  
CH-SEL  
1.  
R6001  
BAND  
ENTER  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
BASS  
TREBLE  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
EX/ES  
EXIT  
1.  
4
5
6
2.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
INPUT SELECTOR  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
7
8
9
A/D  
-
PRESET  
+
-
TUNING  
+
CH-SEL  
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUT  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
MEMO  
SLEEP  
Press the T.DISP button 3 times to displayed  
Signal Status.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
1.  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
CL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
0
+10  
DSD  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
3.  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
CH-SEL  
SURROUND  
MODE  
ENTER  
AUTO  
M
MENU  
EXIT  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
DSS  
MD  
CH-SEL  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
STANDBY  
TUNER  
TAPE  
Press the T.DISP button to displayed  
1.  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
BASS  
TREBLE  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
DSS  
MD  
S I G N A L :  
INFORMATION.  
TUNER  
TAPE  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
1.  
Channel number/name  
Artist name/Song title  
Channel category  
Signal Status  
• The display changes as shown below according to  
the receiving condition.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
• The Radio ID is displayed.  
X M O O O R A D I O I D  
SIGNAL: ■■■■■  
SIGNAL: STRONG  
2.  
(Signal strength is good)  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
SIGNAL: ■■■  
SIGNAL: MARGINAL  
(Signal strength is Marginal)  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.  
1
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
Note:  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLA  
Y
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
If “ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,  
the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock may not be  
connected to the XM terminal on the rear panel of  
this unit properly.  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
When the Channel number/name mode is displayed:  
SIGNAL: ■  
SIGNAL:WEAK  
(Signal strength is poor)  
X M O 4 0 : D e e p T r c  
• The ATT function is also effective when XM is  
selected.  
XM NO SIGNAL  
SIGNAL: NON  
4 0 : D e e p T r a c k s  
(Using the SR6001)  
(Loss of the signal)  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
“TUNER”.  
1.  
2.  
(If text is more than 13 characters long, the text is  
scrolled.)  
Press the BAND button to select either XM or  
DAB.  
Note:  
ThefrontPaneldisplaycanindicateupto13alphanumeric  
characters at once. If the information contains more then  
13 characters, the information scrolls from right to left.  
(Using the remote control unit)  
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice  
within two seconds on the remote.  
1.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the Artist name/Song title is displayed:  
PRESET SEARCH MODE  
PresstheINFObutton.Thefollowinginformation  
display will be output.  
SEARCH MODE  
2.  
3.  
N A M E / T I T L E  
You can search for the channel you want to listen to  
using one of three search modes.You can also enter  
the number directly to select the desired channel.  
1.  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
:DVD  
:XM  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
P i n k F l o i d /  
F l o i d / M o n e y  
RE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
2.  
1.  
SURR-MODE :AUTO  
MULTIROOMA:ON  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
ALL CHANNEL SEARCH MODE  
CH-SEL  
SPK:OFF  
BASS  
TREBLE  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
MULTIROOMB:OFF SPK:OFF  
MAIN VOLUME  
-------------------  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
DSS  
MD  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
l/  
SP  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
TUNER  
TAPE  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
ENTER  
1.  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
BAND  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
The “NAME/TITLE” is displayed for 2 seconds,  
followed by the artist’s name and song title.  
(Ifartist’snameorsongtitleismorethan13characters  
long, the text is scrolled.)  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
OR  
EX/ES  
2.  
4
5
6
PURE DIRECT  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
D
L
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
When this display appears, press the INFO  
button again. XM information like the following  
will appear.  
AAC  
PCM  
S
DSD  
7
8
T.DISP  
+
9
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
REC  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
(Using the SR6001)  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
ENTER  
Note:  
MENU  
EXIT  
PRESET  
TUNING  
+
-
-
PHONES  
The front Panel display can indicate up to 13  
alphanumeric characters at once. If the information  
contains more then 13 characters, the information  
scrolls from right to left.  
XM INFORMATION  
Press the 1 or 2 cursor button on the front  
panel to select the desired preset station.  
1.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
2.  
1.  
CH-SEL  
XM  
CHAN  
NAME  
:040  
:DeepTracks  
:Pink Floid  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
DSS  
MD  
TITLE :Money  
CAT :Rock  
TUNER  
TAPE  
(Using the remote control unit)  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
When the channel category is displayed:  
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice  
within two seconds on the remote.  
1.  
SIGNAL:MARGINAL  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
C A T : R o c k  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
S or T button to tune in the desired  
preset station.  
Press the INFO button again. The information  
display will go out.  
4.  
(Using the SR6001)  
Note:  
• To change the display content from XM information  
to SR6001 functions, do so from the display mode.  
Or enter the preset station number with the  
numeric buttons.  
Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front  
panel to select the desired station.  
1.  
Note:  
(See “DISPLAY MODE” on page 51)  
If the information contains a character that cannot  
be recognized by that unit, the character will be  
displayed with “ ”(space).  
(Using the remote control unit)  
This XM information can also be displayed on a TV  
monitor connected to the SR6001.  
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice  
1.  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
within two seconds on the remote.  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
INFO  
MENU  
Press and hold the 5 or 6 button.  
2.  
ENTER  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
CH-SEL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
DSS  
MD  
TUNER  
TAPE  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
1.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
Press the AMP button on the remote control  
unit.  
1.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CATEGORY SEARCH MODE  
CHANNEL DIRECT CALL  
CHECKING THE XM PRESET CHANNEL  
PRESET MEMORY  
You can select the desired channel from the category  
allocated to each channel.  
Category being aired can be only selected.  
You can select the desired channel by directly tapping  
the numeric keypads on the remote control unit.  
The preset channel can be checked on the on screen  
display.  
You can store the desired channel in the Preset  
Memory.  
(You can preset 60 XM Radio stations in addition to  
FM/AM stations.)  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
l/  
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
CL  
MEMO  
0
+10  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
AUTO  
dts  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
INFO  
MENU  
3.  
2.  
EX/ES  
SOURCE  
SET  
OFF  
ON  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
3.  
2. 4.  
l/  
4
5
6
SLEEP  
DISPLAY  
P.DIRECT  
SURROUND  
2.  
1.  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
ENTER  
INFO  
MENU  
3.  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
7
8
9
A/D  
AUTO  
dts  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
EXIT  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
MEMO  
AAC  
PCM  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
SL  
SR  
SD  
CL  
0
+10  
EX/ES  
E
DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
4
5
6
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
BASS  
TREBLE  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
-
PRESET  
+
-
TUNING  
+
3.  
2.  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
DSS  
MD  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
7
8
9
A/D  
ENTER  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T
-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
MEMO  
TUNER  
TAPE  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
AUDIO  
CL  
ENTER  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
0
+10  
4.  
1.  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
CH-SEL  
ATT.  
ENTER  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
EXIT  
MENU  
EXIT  
BASS  
TREBLE  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
DSS  
MD  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
TUNER  
TAPE  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
2.  
1.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
CH-SEL  
(Using the remote control unit)  
BASS  
TREBLE  
(Using the SR6001)  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
DSS  
MD  
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice  
within two seconds on the remote.  
TUNER  
TAPE  
1.  
Tune into the desired channel.  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
1.  
2.  
(Using the SR6001)  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
Press the ENTER button on the front panel.  
1.  
2.  
- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the  
Press the TUNER button twice within two  
Press the 1 or 2 button on the front panel to  
select the desired Category.  
dispIay.  
seconds on the remote.  
Press the INFO button. to view a list of tuner  
preset channeI on the on screen display.  
4.  
5.  
- - X M 0 4 0  
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice  
within two seconds on the remote.  
1.  
After selecting the Category, Press the 3 or 4  
cursor button to select the desired station of the  
category.  
3.  
If there are 10 or more preset channel, Press  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
the INFO button. again.  
Select the preset number by pressing the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons, While this is still blinking  
(approx. 5 seconds)  
3.  
4.  
Press the TUNER button twice within two  
seconds on the remote.  
You can return to the normal mode by press the  
ENTER button during Category Search Mode.  
4.  
XM  
PRESET LIST  
NO. 1 XM010 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 2 XM011 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 3 XM015 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 4 XM022 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 5 XM125 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 6 XM001 Preview  
NO. 7 XM001 Preview  
NO. 8 XM001 Preview  
NO. 9 XM001 Preview  
NO.10 XM001 Preview  
Press the F.DIRECT button.  
4.  
5.  
0 1 X M 0 4 0  
(Using the remote control unit)  
XM - - -” will appear on the display.  
Input the three digit number for your desired  
Channel with the numeric keypad on the  
remote control unit.  
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice  
within two seconds on the remote.  
1.  
Press the MEMORY button again to enter.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
The display stops blinking.  
The desired channel will automatically be  
tuned.  
6.  
Press the TUNER button twice within two  
seconds on the remote.  
The station is now stored in the specified preset  
memory location.  
Note:  
Note:  
Press the MULTI/CAT button.  
4.  
The preset channel indication disappears in about 5  
sec.  
If there is no input on the keypad for 5sec., the input  
is cancelled to return to the original display  
(Using the remote control unit)  
Press the CAT 3 or CAT 4 button.  
5.  
After selecting the category, Press the Q or  
R button to select the desired station of the  
6.  
Tune into the desired channel.  
1.  
2.  
Notes:  
Press the MEMO button on the remote. “- -”  
(preset number) starts blinking on the display.  
category.  
“LOADING” is displayed while receiving the  
channel or information.  
You can return to the normal mode by press  
the MULTI/CAT button during Category Search  
7.  
Enter the desired preset number by pressing  
3.  
“UPDATINGisdisplayedwhileupdatingencryption  
code.  
the numeric buttons.  
Mode.  
Note:  
Note:  
When the selected channel is not available, “XM - -  
-” is dispIayed.  
When entering a single digit number (2 for example),  
either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few  
seconds.  
Category search automatically ends 5 minutes after  
the last operation.  
“OFF AIR” is displayed while air is suspended (e.g.  
midnight).  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRESET SCAN  
CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS  
CS  
EX/ES  
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
You can remove preset stations from the memory  
using the following procedure.  
4
5
6
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
7
8
9
A/D  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
MEMO  
CL  
2. 5  
2. 3.  
0
+10  
LIP SYNC/  
INPUT  
AUTO  
dts  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
1
CS  
2
3
VIRTUAL T.MODE  
EX/ES  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
4
5
6
V
M-CH ST  
STEREO  
NIGHT  
P.SCAN  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
7
8
9
A/D  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
7.1CH IN  
HT-EQ  
MEMO  
DOWN  
2.  
3.  
CL  
0
+10  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
ER  
BAND  
T
-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
AUDIO  
MultEQ  
MIC  
4.  
1.  
ENTER  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
CH-SEL  
ATT.  
DIGITAL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
INFO  
MENU  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
DSS  
MD  
TUNER  
TAPE  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AMP  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
Recall the preset number to be cleared with  
the method described in “PRESET SERCH  
MODE”.  
1.  
Press the TUNER button twice within two  
seconds on the remote.  
1.  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel  
or Press the MEMO button on the remote.  
2.  
3.  
Press the P.SCAN.  
2.  
3.  
The stored preset number blinks in the display  
for 5 seconds.WhiIe blinking, Press the CLEAR  
button on the front panel or the remote CL  
button.  
Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1  
No.2 etc.) for about 5-10 seconds each.  
The time changes by the received condition.No  
stored preset number will be skipped.  
xx CLEAR” appears on the dispIay to indicate  
that the specified preset number has been  
cleared.  
4.  
Pressing the T button during prescanning  
speeds up scanning.  
4.  
5.  
Also, pressing the S button returns to the  
previous preset station.  
Notes:  
• To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold  
When the desired preset station is received,  
cancel the preset scan operation by press the  
P. SCAN button.  
the CLEAR (CL) and the ENTER buttons for two  
seconds.  
• There are 50 preset channels prepared at the factory  
default. The 50 channels are all set to “CHANNEL  
001”. Each channel can be stored in the preset  
memory. You can search for only the preset  
channels.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To cancel this function, press the MULTI button  
on the unit or remote control (after pressing the  
AMP button on the remote control).  
Select the input source using the INPUT  
SELECTOR knob or function button on the  
remote control.  
Then, the display indicates “MSPKRVOLUME”  
MSPKR VOL.xx” for approx. 5 seconds.  
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI  
ROOM OUT TERMINALS  
4.  
2.  
MULTI ROOM  
SYSTEM  
“MULTI” indicator on the front panel will be  
turned off.  
2.  
1. 4.  
3.  
The Multiroom System mode allows the same source  
or different sources to be heard in two rooms other  
than where this receiver is installed.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
During this time, you can set the volume level in  
the multi room as desired.  
3.  
4.  
Note:  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features  
can also be set using the MAIN MENU.  
(See page 41)  
PURE DIRECT  
URROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
This will only set the volume in the multi room.  
When using the multiroom system, the audio is  
output from the MULTI AUDIO output terminals and  
input to the MULTI ROOM amps.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
To cancel this function, press the MULTI button  
on the unit or remote control (after pressing the  
AMP button on the remote control).  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI  
SPEAKER TERMINALS  
If a surround channel back speaker or speaker C  
(see page 24) are not used in the room where this  
receiver is installed, the multi speaker system can be  
used with the amp for the surround back channel.  
“MULTI” indicator on the front panel will be  
turned off.  
7.1CH IN  
A/D  
HT-EQ  
Note:  
The SR6001 allows you to connect another set  
of speakers and place them in a different room or  
separated area for Iistening to music.  
CL  
CH/ CAT  
MEMO  
0
+10  
VOLUME  
• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features  
can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page  
41.)  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
This receiver supports multiroom system functions  
such as source selectors, OSD menu systems, sleep  
timers and remote control.  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
3.  
1. 4.  
2.  
INFO  
MENU  
2.  
1. 4.  
3.  
Notes for Multi Room Speaker  
• The MULTI ROOM SPEAKER output terminals can  
be used when Surround Back Speaker = “NONE”  
in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER  
SETUP, page 31)  
ENTER  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
READY  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
EXIT  
PURE DIRECT  
URROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.1  
NIGHT  
EQ  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
• “The Surr. Back Speakers are in use” is displayed  
when the MULTI SPEAKER button is pressed  
when the Surround Back Speaker is not set to  
NONE” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See  
SPEAKER SETUP, page 31)  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
MIC  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
CH-SEL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TUNER  
TAPE  
• The Multispeaker mode cannot be used at the  
same time as the speaker C. When connecting for  
multiroom use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch  
on the rear panel to OFF.  
AUX1  
AMP  
1. 4.  
7.1CH IN  
A/D  
HT-EQ  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
CL  
CH/ CAT  
MEMO  
0
+10  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
3.  
1. 4.  
2.  
Press the MULTI button on the unit or remote  
control (after pressing the AMP button on the  
remote control). The unit enters MULTI ROOM  
mode, and the display indicates “SELECT  
SOURCE.The “MULTI” indicator will fl ash for  
about 10 seconds.  
INFO  
MENU  
1.  
ENTER  
T.TONE  
/SET UP  
EXIT  
REC  
T.DISP  
PTY  
F.DIRECT  
PRESET  
TUNING  
-
+
-
+
Select the input source using the INPUT  
SELECTOR knob or function button on the  
remote control.  
DISC+  
ANGLE  
V-OFF  
SUB TITLE  
ATT.  
AUDIO  
2.  
3.  
CH-SEL  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TUNER  
TAPE  
Then, the display indicates “MULTI VOLUME”  
MULTI VOL. xx” for approx. 5 seconds.  
AUX1  
AMP  
1. 4.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
During this time, you can set the volume level in  
the multi room as desired.  
This will only set the volume in the second  
room.  
Press the MULTI SPEAKER (M-SPKR) button.  
The unit enters multi room speaker mode and  
the display indicates “SELECT SOURCE” and  
fl ashes the “MULTI” indicators for approx. 10  
seconds.  
1.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General:  
Controlling volume level, sleep timer, and muting.  
SeIecting input audio and video source.  
Tuner:  
OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS WITH  
THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI ROOM  
Multi Room output can be operated from a room  
where the receiver is not installed. This requires a  
separately sold IR receiver. (For connections, see  
page 24.)  
Selecting band, controlling preset channel up and  
down, tuning up and down direct frequency call.  
Notes for the Multi Room System  
• The MULTI ROOM OUT (MULTI OUT/MULTI  
SPEAKER) has analog outputs.  
+10  
BASS  
TREBLE  
CH/ CAT  
VOLUME  
SPKR A/B  
MUTE  
TV  
DVD  
CD  
VCR  
CDR  
AUX2  
DSS  
MD  
TUNER  
TAPE  
MULTI/ CAT M-SPKR  
This does not support digital input signals.  
2.  
1.  
AUX1  
AMP  
1.  
INFO  
MENU  
• If the Tuner (FM or AM) is active in the main room,  
you can not control any function of the tuner.In this  
case, You must listen to the same station as the main  
room.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC5001SR  
ENTER  
T.TONE  
• When the component with RC-5 bus is connected to  
the MULTI RC IN jack(see page 24), Multiroom can  
be operated using the RC codes for the main room.  
The remote control units of other Marantz products  
can also be used to control multiroom.  
Press MULTI on the multi room remote control  
from the MULTI ROOM.  
1.  
(Press the AMP button first to enter the AMP  
mode then press the MULTI button.)  
This operations will put the SR6001 into multi  
room mode and “MULTI” will be illuminated on  
the display.  
Press the VOLUME+ or VOLUME− button on  
the multi room remote control to set the desired  
volume.  
2.  
3.  
In multi room mode, the multi room remote  
control can be used in the multiroom to operate  
the following functions.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
Make the correct setting.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Can not select EX/ES mode.  
Surround center= NONE has been  
selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP  
In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Are the connections made properly ?  
Are you operating the unit properly following the user’s guide ?  
Are the power amplifiers and speaker working properly ?  
Use 5.1channel source.  
Input signal is incompatible.  
Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input  
signal or analog input signal.  
Can not select Pro Logic IIx Input signal is incompatible.  
mode.  
Use 2 channel DTS input signal, PCM input signal or  
analog input signal.  
Can not select Neo:6 mode.  
Can not select CSII mode.  
No output to Subwoofer Out.  
Input signal is incompatible.  
Input signal is incompatible.  
If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following table.  
If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the  
internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest Marantz  
authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country.  
Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input  
signal or analog input signal.  
Select Subwoofer = YES.  
Subwoofer = NONE has been selected  
in SETUP mode.  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital  
input, then play.  
Noise is produced during Analog has been selected for input.  
DTS-encoded CD or laser  
disc play.  
Connect the power plug to the outlet.  
SR6001 cannot be turned The power plug is not connected.  
up.  
Cancel mute using the remote control unit.  
No sound and picture are Mute is on.  
output even when power is  
Check the encoded channel on the source side.  
A specific channel does not Nothing recorded on source.  
produce output.  
on.  
See the connection diagram and connect the cables  
correctly.  
The input cable is not connected  
correctly.  
Correctly connect the indoor FM and AM antennas  
to FM and AM antenna outlets.  
FM or AM reception fails.  
Antenna connection is incomplete.  
Adjust the master volume.  
Select correct position.  
The master volume control is turned all  
the way down.  
Try changing location where the AM indoor antenna  
is set up.  
Noise is heard during AM Reception is affected by other electrical  
reception. fields.  
The function selector position is wrong.  
Install an FM outdoor antenna.  
Noise is heard during FM The radio waves from the broadcasting  
reception. station are weak.  
Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not  
output sound when headphones are connected.)  
No speaker output.  
The headphones are connected to the  
headphone jack.  
Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time  
will erase preset data. If that happens, input the  
preset data again.  
Cannot get programmed Preset data has been erased.  
station when the PRESET  
button is pressed.  
Connect the cable correctly by referring to the  
connection diagram.  
Incorrect Audio or Video for Input cable connected incorrectly.  
selected source.  
Connect the cable correctly by referring to the  
connection diagram.  
Incorrect Audio from  
channel.  
a
Speaker cable connected incorrectly.  
Replace all the batteries with new ones.  
Control with the remote Batteries are consumed.  
control unit fails.  
Select different position from which equipment will  
be controlled.  
Remote controller's function-key setting  
is wrong.  
Connect the cable correctly.  
No Audio output from the The center speaker cable connection is  
center channel speaker.  
incomplete.  
Move closer to this SR6001.  
Remove offending object.  
Disconnect the headphones.  
The distance between this SR6001 and  
the remote commander is too far.  
When STEREO is selected for Surround mode, no  
sound will be output from the center speaker. Set  
another Surround mode.  
STEREO has been selected for Surround  
mode.  
Something is blocking SR6001 and the  
remote commander.  
Make the correct setting.  
Center = NONE has been selected in  
SETUP mode.  
Auto Setup (SPEAKER Headphones are connected.  
SETUP) is not working.  
Connect the cable correctly.  
No Audio output from the The surround speaker cable connection  
surround speakers.  
is incomplete.  
Note:  
When STEREO has been selected for Surround  
mode, no sound will be output from the surround  
speaker. Set another Surround mode.  
STEREO has been selected for Surround  
mode.  
• After “PROTECT” appears on the unit’s display, the standby indicator may start flashing. If it does, there is a  
problem in the unit or the connection. If this problem reoccurs even when power is activated from the remote control  
unit, call for servicing.  
Make the correct setting.  
Surround = NONE has been selected in  
SETUP mode.  
Connect the cable correctly.  
No Audio output from the The surround back speaker cable  
surround back speakers.  
connection is incomplete.  
Set surround mode EX/ES.  
Make the correct setting.  
Surround mode is not EX/ES mode.  
Surround back = NONE has been  
selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDMI  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
If a problem should arise, first check the following.  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
1. Are the connections correct?  
The display does not The connected monitor or projector  
appear over an HDMI does not support HDCP.  
connection.  
2. Have you operated the receiver according to the operating instructions?  
3. Are the speakers and other components operating properIy?  
The HDMI input of on the TV is Set HDMI input so that it turns on, as  
not on. explained in the TV's instruction manual.  
If this unit is not operating properly, Check the items listed in the table beIow. Should the problem persist, there  
may be a malfunction. Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.  
The HDMI output on the source Set HDMI output so that it turns on, as  
component (DVD, Set Top Box, explained in the source component's  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
etc.) is not on.  
instruction manual.  
“ANTENNA” is displayed.  
XM terminal and the XM Mini-Tuner and Check that the connection are correct.  
Home Dock is not properly connected.  
The HDMI mode is not correctly Set HDMI input on the FUNC INPUT  
set on the SR6001. SETUP menu as explained on page 29.  
“NO SIGNAL” is displayed.  
The signal cannot be received.  
Reposition your XM Mini-Tuner and Home  
Dock.  
The HDMI output video resolution Set the resolution so that it matches, as  
of the source component (DVD, explained in the instruction manuals of both  
Set Top Box, etc.) does not match components.  
Receiving only XM channels 0 and 1.  
The XM Tuner is not activated.  
Contact XM Radio.  
the TV specifications.  
The device is connected with a A 5 m or shorter cable is recommended to  
non-standard HDMI cable.  
ensure stable operation and prevent image  
quality deterioration.  
Power to the SR6001 is off. Turn on the power to the SR6001.  
(When the SR6001 is on standby,  
HDMI connections cannot be  
turned on.)  
The connection between Shut off and then turn the power back on to  
HDMI components was not the SR6001, TV and source component.  
authenticated.  
Time is needed for the The connection is being There is nothing wrong with the system.  
display of an HDMI authenticated between the HDMI Some HDMI devices require time for  
connection to appear.  
devices.  
authentication.  
Audio is not played The HDMI audio output of the Set the HDMI audio output so that it turns  
back over an HDMI source component (DVD, Set Top on, as explained in the source component's  
connection.  
Box, etc.) is not on.  
instruction manual.  
The signal format of the source Set the HDMI audio output so that it can  
component (DVD, Set Top Box, connect to the SR6001, as explained in the  
etc.) is not supported by the source component's instruction manual.  
SR6001.  
The SR6001 is set to the HDMI In the “THROUGH” mode, sound is not  
audio “THROUGH” mode.  
produced from the SR6001. Set it to  
“ENABLE”. (see page 40)  
DVD-Audio is not played The DVD player does not support • Use a DVD-Audio player that supports  
back over an HDMI CPPM, therefore it cannot output  
connection. HDMI audio.  
CPPM.  
Turn on PCM downsampling on the DVD  
player.  
• Use an analog connection.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL MALFUNCTION  
ACCESSORIES  
If the equipment malfunctions, this may be because  
an electrostatic discharge or AC line interference has  
corrupted the information in the equipment memory  
circuits. Therefore:  
TECHNICAL  
SPECIFICATIONS  
FM TUNER SECTION  
Remote Control Unit RC5001SR................................... 1  
AAA-size batteries ........................................................ 2  
FM Antenna ................................................................... 1  
AM Loop Antenna .......................................................... 1  
Front AUX Jack Cover .................................................. 1  
AC cable ....................................................................... 1  
-
-
disconnect the plug from the AC line supply  
after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect  
the plug to the AC line supply  
Frequency Range ................................87.5 – 108.0 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity ............................IHF 1.8 µV/16.4 dBf  
Signal to Noise Ratio ................... Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB  
Distortion......................................Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3 %  
Stereo Separation.........................................1 kHz 45 dB  
Alternate Channel Selectivity................. 300 kHz 60 dB  
Image Rejection.........................................98 MHz 70 dB  
Tuner Output Level ........... 1 kHz, 75 kHz Dev 800 mV  
Specifications subject to change without prior notice.  
-
re-attempt to operate the equipment  
Memory backup  
• In case a power outage occurs or the power  
cord is accidentally unplugged, the SR6001  
is equipped with a backup function to prevent  
memory data such as the preset memory  
from being erased.  
DIMENSIONS  
AM TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range ................................... 520 – 1710 kHz  
Signal to Noise Ratio ..............................................50 dB  
Usable Sensitivity .........................................Loop 400µV  
Distortion...................................400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5 %  
Selectivity................................................. 20 kHz 70 dB  
HOW TO RESET THE UNIT  
AUDIO SECTION  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 100 W / Ch  
Center................................................8 ohms 100 W / Ch  
Surround L&R....................................8 ohms 100 W / Ch  
Surround Back L&R...........................8 ohms 100 W / Ch  
PURE DIRECT  
SURROUND  
DIGITAL  
DISP  
MULTI  
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP  
AUTO SURR  
MT  
X
6.  
1
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
AAC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLA  
Y
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT HT-EQ  
MultEQ  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 120 W / Ch  
Center................................................6 ohms 120 W / Ch  
Surround L&R....................................6 ohms 120 W / Ch  
Surround Back L&R...........................6 ohms 120 W / Ch  
Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal,  
reset the unit with the following procedure.  
The SR6001 is turned on, press and hold the MULTI  
+ SPEAKERS A/B buttons simultaneously for 3  
seconds or more.  
Remember that the procedure will reset the settings  
of the function selector, Surround mode, delay time,  
TUNER PRESET etc., to their initial settings.  
Input Sensitivity/Impedance...............168 mV/ 47 Kohms  
Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct) ....105 dB  
Frequency Response  
(Analog Input / Pure Direct)  
...........................................8 Hz – 100 kHz ( 3 dB)  
(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM)  
............................................ 8 Hz – 45 kHz ( 3 dB)  
VIDEO  
Television Format....................................................NTSC  
Input Level/Impedance ...........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms  
Output Level/Impedance.........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms  
Video Frequency Response .......5 Hz to 8 MHz (– 1 dB)  
Video Frequency (Component) ....5 Hz to 80 MHz (– 1 dB)  
S/N..........................................................................60 dB  
17-5/16 ins. (440 mm)  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR6001  
READY  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VOLUME  
PURE DIRECT  
RROUND  
DIGITAL  
D
I
S
P
M
U
L
T
I
AUTO  
TUNED  
DIRECT  
ST SPKR  
DISC 6.1  
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
S
L
E
E
P
A
U
T
O
S
U
R
R
MT  
X
6.  
1
NIGHT  
EQ  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
A
AC  
PCM  
SL  
SR  
DSD  
DOWN  
UP  
HDMI  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
BAND  
T
-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLA  
Y
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MultEQ  
MIC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
Version...........................................................1.2 [INPUT]  
...........................................................1.1 [OUTPUT]  
HT-EQ  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement................................AC 120 V 60 Hz  
Power Consumption ................................................. 6.3A  
Weight....................................................33.1lbs (15.0 kg)  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Goldstar................................1003, 1013, 1024  
1030, 1045, 1080  
Proscan..................... 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007  
1008, 1085, 1103, 1110  
Proton.............................................1003, 1045  
Quasar ............ 1010, 1069, 1073, 1111, 1153  
Radio Shack.........................1003, 1013, 1015  
1023, 1024, 1025, 1045  
1100, 1103, 1110, 1113  
RCA......................................1003, 1004, 1005  
1006, 1007, 1008  
Video Concepts........................................1113  
Viewsonic.............................1006, 1022, 1109  
1128, 1129, 1130, 1131  
1138, 1143, 1145, 1150  
Wards...................................1003, 1009, 1015  
1024, 1038, 1044, 1046  
1052, 1054, 1056, 1057  
1067, 1086, 1103, 1110  
White Westinghouse ......................1001, 1101  
Yamaha ..........................................1003, 1024  
Zenith ...................................1003, 1009, 1010  
1132, 1144, 1153  
SETUP CODES  
1100, 1112, 1154  
Hallmark...................................................1003  
Hisense ....................................................1116  
Hitachi ....................... 1003, 1012, 1031, 1032  
1037, 1041, 1045, 1047  
TV  
Acer..........................................................1141  
Admiral .................................1002, 1009, 1089  
Aiko ..........................................................1059  
Aiwa................................................1117, 1118  
Akai ..........................................................1001  
Amtron......................................................1023  
Anam........................................................1113  
Anam National......................1023, 1069, 1092  
AOC........................... 1003, 1024, 1049, 1127  
Audiovox...................................................1023  
Bell & Howell..................................1009, 1025  
Benq...............................................1104, 1142  
Broksonic .................. 1003, 1097, 1098, 1113  
Celebrity...................................................1001  
Citizen ..................................1003, 1013, 1023  
1026, 1059, 1063  
Colortyme.......................................1003, 1043  
Contec......................................................1113  
Contec/Cony ........................1023, 1045, 1047  
Craig.......................... 1020, 1022, 1023, 1113  
Crown.............................................1023, 1067  
Curtis Mathes.......................1003, 1013, 1025  
1026, 1062, 1103, 1110  
1065, 1068, 1082, 1088  
1094, 1139, 1140, 1145, 1159  
Infinity.......................................................1067  
Janeil........................................................1134  
JBL ...........................................................1067  
JC Penney............................1003, 1013, 1018  
1019, 1024, 1026  
1014, 1024, 1049, 1069  
1075, 1079, 1085, 1087  
1088, 1093, 1094, 1101  
1103, 1110, 1113, 1153  
Realistic..................... 1013, 1015, 1023, 1025  
1045, 1100, 1103, 1110  
Runco.............................................1010, 1153  
Sampo......................................................1150  
Samsung................... 1003, 1013, 1024, 1026  
1040, 1045, 1062, 1078  
1046, 1047, 1054  
1063, 1083, 1085  
1100, 1103, 1110  
1112, 1133, 1154  
VCR  
Admiral ...........................................3026, 3060  
Adventura.................................................3035  
Aiko ..........................................................3038  
Aiwa................................................3035, 3039  
Akai ................................................3003, 3053  
3054, 3072, 3073  
American High .........................................3009  
Asha .........................................................3021  
Audio Dynamics ...................3034, 3040, 3083  
Audiovox...................................................3052  
Beaumark.......................................3017, 3021  
Bell & Howell............................................3029  
Broksonic .......................................3029, 3075  
Calix .........................................................3052  
Candle..................................3012, 3021, 3034  
3038, 3050, 3052, 3056  
Canon.............................................3008, 3009  
Capehart ..................................................3050  
Carver.............................................3045, 3062  
CCE................................................3038, 3067  
Challenger................................................3078  
Citizen ............. 3012, 3021, 3038, 3052, 3056  
Colortyme.......................................3034, 3079  
Colt...........................................................3067  
Craig.......................... 3021, 3032, 3052, 3067  
Criterion....................................................3067  
Curtis Mathes.................................3008, 3009  
3021, 3034, 3063  
Cybernex..................................................3021  
Daewoo ................................3035, 3038, 3050  
Daytron...........................................3038, 3050  
DBX......................................3034, 3040, 3083  
Denon.......................................................3005  
Jensen......................................................1003  
JVC.......................................1028, 1029, 1045  
1047, 1050, 1060, 1065  
Kawasho.........................................1001, 1003  
Kenwood ..................................................1003  
Kloss Novabeam....... 1023, 1056, 1057, 1134  
KTV ......................................1013, 1023, 1033  
1034, 1073, 1099, 1113  
LG...................................................1024, 1030  
M.Wards...............................1002, 1009, 1038  
Magnavox.............................1003, 1052, 1053  
1056, 1057, 1063  
1083, 1090, 1100, 11051114  
1120, 1121, 1146, 1148, 1157  
Sansui ......................................................1119  
Sanyo ........................ 1003, 1025, 1051, 1072  
1077, 1091, 1156, 1157, 1158  
Sharp....................................1003, 1013, 1014  
1015, 1045, 1055, 1064  
1066, 1076, 1089, 1123  
Signature..................................................1009  
Sony .....................................1001, 1102, 1108  
Soundesign ..... 1003, 1023, 1038, 1063, 1113  
Starlite ......................................................1023  
Supre-Macy..............................................1134  
Sylvania................................1003, 1039, 1042  
1052, 1053, 1056, 1057  
Daewoo ..................... 1003, 1013, 1024, 1035  
1036, 1059, 1084, 1101  
1067, 1081, 1106  
Daytron.................................1003, 1013, 1016  
Dimensia ........................................1103, 1110  
Dumont.................................1003, 1010, 1153  
Electroband..............................................1001  
Electrohome.............. 1001, 1003, 1069, 1133  
Emerson...............................1003, 1013, 1015  
1020, 1021, 1022, 1023  
Marantz ..................... 1003, 1031, 1067, 1122  
Mitsubishi .............................1003, 1024, 1051  
1115, 1122, 1133  
Motorola .........................................1014, 1069  
NEC................. 1003, 1012, 1024, 1043, 1069  
NET-TV...........................................1137, 1150  
Orion...............................................1020, 1096  
Panasonic........ 1017, 1067, 1069, 1095, 1111  
Philips........................ 1003, 1011, 1045, 1052  
1054, 1056, 1057, 1058  
1063, 1067, 1089, 1151  
Symphonic ...........................1023, 1039, 1044  
Tandy........................................................1014  
Tatung.......................................................1069  
Technics ...................................................1018  
Techwood.......................................1003, 1018  
Teknika ...................... 1003, 1009, 1013, 1023  
1024, 1026, 1038, 1045  
1025, 1038, 1044, 1045  
1048, 1055, 1061, 1094  
1096, 1099, 1101, 1113  
Envision....................................................1003  
Fisher ........................ 1025, 1051, 1091, 1160  
Fujitsu........................ 1038, 1124, 1125, 1155  
Funai ....................................1023, 1038, 1113  
Gateway ...................................................1150  
GE ............................ 1003, 1018, 1022, 1046  
1054, 1069, 1085, 1103  
1063, 1067, 1069, 1106  
Pioneer.................................1003, 1018, 1037  
1070, 1071, 1094  
1047, 1059, 1063, 1111, 1113  
Telecaption...............................................1074  
Toshiba.................................1003, 1019, 1025  
1026, 1042, 1074, 1098  
1107, 1111, 1135, 1136  
Totevision .................................................1013  
Universal ........................................1046, 1054  
1145, 1147, 1149  
Plasmsync................................................1135  
Portland..................... 1003, 1013, 1024, 1059  
Price Club.................................................1026  
Prism........................................................1018  
1110, 1113, 1133, 1136, 1153  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensia ..............................3004, 3063, 3085  
Dixon ..............................................3077, 3081  
Dynatech..................................................3035  
Electrohome.............................................3052  
Electrophonic ...........................................3052  
Emerson.................... 3009, 3015, 3016, 3017  
3018, 3019, 3022, 3035  
MEI...........................................................3009  
Memorex ..............................3005, 3009, 3021  
3026, 3029, 3032, 3035  
Samsung..............................3013, 3020, 3021  
3056, 3068, 3069, 3070  
DVD  
Sanky ...................................3026, 3060, 3071  
Sansui ............. 3040, 3048, 3067, 3072, 3083  
Sanyo ...................................3021, 3029, 3032  
Scott .......................... 3012, 3017, 3022, 3052  
Sears....................................3005, 3009, 3029  
3032, 3034, 3052, 3084  
Sharp......................... 3026, 3027, 3060, 3064  
Shintom................................3003, 3005, 3067  
Shogun.....................................................3021  
Signature........................................3026, 3060  
Signature 2000.....................3026, 3029, 3084  
Singer........................ 3002, 3009, 3059, 3067  
Sony .......................... 3001, 3003, 3043, 3065  
STS ................................................3005, 3009  
Sylvania................................3008, 3009, 3022  
3035, 3045, 3062, 3076  
Symphonic ...........................3034, 3035, 3056  
Tandy..............................................3029, 3084  
Tashiko .....................................................3052  
Tatung.......................................................3072  
Teac................................................3035, 3072  
Technics .........................................3007, 3009  
Teknika .................................3009, 3035, 3052  
TMK..........................................................3021  
Toshiba.................................3005, 3011, 3012  
3022, 3051, 3073  
Totevision .......................................3021, 3052  
Unitec .......................................................3056  
Unitech.....................................................3021  
Vector Research........ 3012, 3034, 3040, 3083  
Victor ..............................................3040, 3083  
Video Concepts..............................3012, 3034  
3040, 3073, 3083  
Aiwa................................................2036, 2037  
Apex ...... 2012, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2021, 2034  
BOSE .............................................2038, 2039  
Denon.............................................2047, 2048  
Funai ........................................................2049  
GE ............................. 2009, 2020, 2029, 2033  
Harman Kardon........................................2061  
Hitachi ..................................2008, 2012, 2031  
JVC.......................................2006, 2010, 2040  
2041, 2042, 2043  
Kenwood ........................................2053, 2054  
Koss..........................................................2058  
Magnavox.................. 2007, 2011, 2023, 2025  
Marantz ....................................................2025  
Mitsubishi .......................................2011, 2015  
Onkyo.......................................................2062  
Oritron ............................................2009, 2030  
Panasonic.................. 2003, 2015, 2016, 2055  
Philips...................................2007, 2011, 2058  
Pioneer.................................2002, 2014, 2056  
Proscan................................2009, 2020, 2032  
RCA................. 2005, 2009, 2020, 2035, 2057  
Sampo......................................................2041  
Samsung......... 2008, 2012, 2022, 2024, 2027  
Sanyo .............................................2050, 2052  
Sharp..............................................2044, 2045  
Sherwood.................................................2051  
Sony .....................................2001, 2013, 2059  
Toshiba...................... 2004, 2008, 2026, 2028  
Yamaha ..........................................2046, 2060  
Zenith .......................................................2010  
3052, 3060, 3067, 3071  
MGA...............................................3022, 3073  
MGN Technology......................................3021  
Midland.....................................................3056  
Minolta......................................................3005  
Mitsubishi .............................3005, 3022, 3023  
3025, 3048, 3052, 3073  
Montgomery Ward..........................3026, 3060  
Motorola ...............................3009, 3026, 3060  
MTC................................................3021, 3067  
Multitech...............................3021, 3035, 3067  
NEC......................................3033, 3034, 3040  
3048, 3072, 3083  
Nikko ........................................................3052  
Noblex ......................................................3021  
Olympus...................................................3009  
Optimus................................3026, 3052, 3060  
Optonica...................................................3027  
Orion.......................... 3015, 3017, 3047, 3052  
Panasonic........ 3006, 3007, 3008, 3009, 3067  
Pentax ..................................3005, 3034, 3074  
Philco............... 3005, 3008, 3009, 3047, 3062  
Philips.............. 3009, 3010, 3027, 3045, 3062  
Pilot ..........................................................3052  
Pioneer.................................3005, 3040, 3046  
3048, 3061, 3080, 3083  
Portland....................................................3050  
Proscan................................3004, 3063, 3085  
Protec.......................................................3067  
Proton.......................................................3067  
Pulsar ........................ 3021, 3038, 3056, 3071  
Quarter...........................................3029, 3084  
Quartz ............................................3029, 3084  
Quasar ...........................................3008, 3009  
Radio Shack.............. 3021, 3052, 3009, 3008  
3035, 3027, 3060, 3026  
3047, 3052, 3054, 3073  
Fisher .............................................3029, 3032  
Fuji..................................................3003, 3009  
Funai ..............................................3035, 3056  
Garrard.....................................................3035  
GE ........................................3004, 3008, 3009  
3021, 3028, 3058  
3063, 3074, 3085  
Go Video ..............................3021, 3036, 3037  
3052, 3067, 3068, 3069  
Goldstar..................... 3021, 3031, 3034, 3052  
Gradiente .......................................3035, 3052  
Harley Davidson.......................................3035  
Harman Kardon..............................3034, 3045  
Harwood...................................................3067  
Headquarter.............................................3029  
Hitachi ............. 3004, 3005, 3055, 3072, 3074  
Homeline..................................................3052  
Instant Replay ..........................................3009  
JBL ...........................................................3002  
JC Penney................. 3005, 3008, 3009, 3017  
3021, 3029, 3034, 3040  
3052, 3062, 3067, 3083  
JCL...........................................................3009  
Jensen............................................3005, 3072  
JVC.......................................3014, 3015, 3034  
3040, 3041, 3042  
3048, 3049, 3072, 3083  
Kenwood ................... 3029, 3034, 3048, 3072  
KLH ..........................................................3067  
Kodak .............................................3009, 3052  
LG...................................................3031, 3052  
Lloyds...................................3034, 3035, 3056  
Logik.........................................................3067  
LXI............................................................3052  
Magnasonic..........................3038, 3052, 3067  
Magnavox.............................3008, 3009, 3010  
3045, 3067, 3071  
Videosonic................................................3021  
Wards...................................3005, 3009, 3012  
3021, 3026, 3027  
3032, 3035, 3045  
3052, 3060, 3061, 3067  
White Westinghouse ......................3035, 3056  
XR-1000...............................3009, 3035, 3067  
Yamaha ................................3029, 3034, 3040  
3072, 3083, 3084  
DSS  
Alphastar..................................................4027  
BSB ..........................................................4021  
Chaparral .................................................4039  
DIRECTV .......................................4001, 4016  
DISH Network ..........................................4030  
Drake........................................................4026  
Echostar.......... 4007, 4017, 4018, 4019, 4020  
Express Vu ...............................................4017  
Fujitsu.......................................................4025  
GE ........................................4002, 4008, 4009  
General Instruments ......................4036, 4037  
Hitachi ............................................4001, 4015  
Radix ........................................................3052  
Randex.....................................................3052  
RCA......................................3004, 3005, 3009  
3021, 3046, 3054, 3057  
3061, 3063, 3074, 3085  
Realistic..................... 3008, 3009, 3012, 3021  
3026, 3027, 3029, 3032  
3035, 3052, 3060, 3084  
Ricoh ..............................................3002, 3059  
Runco.......................................................3071  
Zenith .............. 3030, 3052, 3053, 3059, 3071  
Magnin ...........................................3021, 3052  
Marantz ................................3009, 3029, 3034  
3040, 3045, 3062, 3083  
Marta........................................................3052  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hughes...........................................4001, 4016  
Janeil........................................................4025  
JVC...........................................................4017  
Mitsubishi .................................................4001  
Panasonic.......................................4004, 4010  
Philips.............................................4031, 4035  
Proscan..................... 4002, 4008, 4009, 4011  
Radio Shack...................................4036, 4037  
RCA........................... 4002, 4008, 4009, 4029  
Realistic....................................................4040  
Rural Cable ..............................................4036  
Samsung........................................4022, 4027  
Sony .....................................4003, 4012, 4014  
Star Choice ..............................................4032  
Star Trak ...................................................4024  
STS ..........................................................4038  
SuperDish ................................................4028  
Toshiba...........................................4001, 4034  
Uniden..................................4005, 4006, 4013  
Video Pall .................................................4025  
Zenith .............................................4025, 4033  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.  
is a registered trademark.  
Printed in China  
12/2006 00M25CW851250 mzh-d  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

KTM Motorcycle 85 SX User Manual
Learning Resources Baby Toy LER 2298 User Manual
Learning Resources Baby Toy Ler 2574 User Manual
Lennox Hearth Indoor Fireplace view door User Manual
Lenovo Car Video System L2262 User Manual
LG Electronics Air Conditioner LA121HPMI User Manual
LG Electronics Flat Panel Television V909 User Manual
Lochinvar Boiler KBN399 User Manual
Lucent Technologies Network Card VPN Firewall Brick 20 User Manual
Master Bilt Refrigerator MTD 06 User Manual